JP2020081368A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To appropriately handle with a problem.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game comprehensively; performance control means (performance control device 300) for controlling a performance on the basis of performance information transmitted from the game control means; and putout control means (putout control device 200) for controlling putout of a game medium on the basis of putout information transmitted from the game control means. The putout control means includes putout information storage means (RAM211C) having a putout information storage area for storing the received putout information, and discards new putout information when receiving the new putout information in a state where the putout information storage area is full due to unprocessed putout information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied and paying out a game medium when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied.

There is known a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result. In such a gaming machine, information is adapted to be transmitted from the game control means for controlling the game as a whole to sub-control means for controlling the effect and payout (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-110126, A

In the sub-control means, the information received from the game control means is temporarily stored, but if an abnormality such as a delay in processing occurs in the sub-control means, an area for storing the information received from the game control means is created. There is a possibility that a problem may occur in which the information is filled up and new information cannot be received. An object of the present invention is to appropriately deal with a defect.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the satisfaction of a predetermined payout condition,
A game control means for controlling the game as a whole,
Production control means for controlling production based on production information transmitted from the game control means,
And a payout control means for controlling payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control means,
The payout control means,
A payout information storage unit having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information,
When the new payout information is received in a state where the payout information storage area is empty due to the unprocessed payout information, the new payout information is discarded.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judging processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judging processing. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a falling lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process and a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining a decoration special figure command table. It is the program list which shows the program structure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a figure explaining a variable time value table. It is a figure explaining a fluctuation pattern number correction table. It is a program list which shows the program structure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining time shortening change frequency update processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a change in special figure 1. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 process during a change. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing in fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing in fanfare/interval. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end setting process 1 and a big hit end setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state command transmission process. It is a figure explaining the structure of the game machine state command. It is a figure showing an example of the data structure of ROM which a game control device has. It is a figure explaining a big hit judgment. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining reception command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining prefetching pattern system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart explaining timer interruption processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart explaining command reception processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of command reception processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout device control start determination process. It is a flow chart explaining pay-out busy signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining an outline of processing of a command.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is attached to a support frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is a front frame 1
It is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of 2. Also, the front frame (main frame) 1
2, a glass frame 15 (including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 (
A transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps and LEDs are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp or LED (for example, red). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. In addition, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b inform the user of the abnormality by voice. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown)
Reservoir plate), upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full. A lower tray (sauce tray) 23 for storing and an operation unit 24 of the ball-striking launcher are provided. Furthermore, the plate 21
At the upper edge portion of the effect button switch 25a for receiving the pressing operation input from the player
An effect button 25 with a built-in is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 to cause the ball-striking launcher to shoot the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. To do. In addition, the player uses the effect button 25 or the touch panel 2
By operating 9, the player can intervene in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2).

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat-shaped game board body 8 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
Equipped with 0. The game board body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 on the front surface of the game board body 80. A game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a hitting ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40, which forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game, is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 forming a warp flow path for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball passing through the warp flow path rolling. And a possible stage portion 620 are provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right part of the center case 40, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (not shown), and this movable member always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is a predetermined result, the universal ball 37d (see FIG. 3) as a drive device allows the game ball to easily flow into the regular variation winning device 37 (open state (game). It is possible to change it to an advantageous condition for the person).

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal variation winning device 37 is the universal solenoid 37.
Although it is a so-called Vero type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes (slides) in the front-back direction by c, the movable member of the ordinary variation winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary variable winning device 3
The movable member 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by pivoting the upper end side toward the front side by the universal electric solenoid 37c, or it may be an inverted "ha" by the universal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of "."
In addition, the normal variation winning device 37 allows the game ball to win even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game ball is more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the universal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there are a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 38 is provided. In the first special variation winning device 38, an opening/closing member (not shown) moves forward and backward (slides).
By doing so, the upper prize hole is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow. First special variation winning device 3
Numeral 8 converts the upper special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game balls into the upper special winning opening, thereby making it possible for the player to perform a predetermined operation. A game value (prize ball) is given. The game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

Inside the upper special winning opening (the winning area), a specific area into which the game ball can flow is provided, and the lever solenoid 38f is arranged to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the specific area.
A lever member that is operated by (see FIG. 3) is provided. The specific area is provided with a specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball, and based on the fact that the specific area switch 38d detects the game ball, the advantageous state for the player is found. It occurs (in this embodiment, a high-probability state occurs after the special game state ends). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variation winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper special winning opening, there is provided a remaining ball outlet switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variation winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper special winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper special winning opening), the specific area switch 38d, and the remaining ball discharging switch 38
By matching with the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize hole), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize hole have been discharged, and basically this confirmation Until the end of, the opening of a new upper prize hole will not be done.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, to the right of the starting winning opening 36, a second special variation winning prize that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize winning opening) 39 is provided. Second special variable winning device 3
9, an opening/closing member (not shown) moves forward and backward (slides) to convert the lower special winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow. The second special variation winning device 39 converts the lower special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower special winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variation winning device 39 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the start winning opening 36 is provided with an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not been won in the winning opening or the like. In addition, outside the game area 32, the game board body 80
In the lower right corner of the, special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game)
Also, a collective display device 50 for executing the universal figure variation display game is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) or the like.
Special display 1 display (first special display fluctuation display section) 51 for variable display game, special figure 2 display (second special display fluctuation display section) 52 for special display 2 variable display game, and LED lamp The first memory display unit 53 for informing the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second memory display unit 54 for informing the number of starting memories of the special figure 2 variable display game which are configured by LED lamps Prepare

In addition, the collective display device 50 is advantageous to the player among the round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38 and 39), left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying how to hit (how to hit corresponding to the game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. There is. In addition, the collective display device 50, a probability state display section that displays that the probability state of the big hit is high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a display that lights up when the big hit occurs and notifies the big hit occurrence A part (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, the public figure display unit 58 for displaying the general figure variable display game, the memory display unit 59 for informing the number of starting memories of the general figure variable display game, and the time saving state which lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed at the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segment is also driven to blink. It is displayed that it is changing, and special figure 1
And the special figure 2 are configured to be distinguishable. When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment (in addition to the special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side as a result) is turned on as a result mode of the out, and the result of the game is In the case of “win”, the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the off result mode (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of unexploited balls (starting memory number=holding number) among the winning ball numbers into the starting winning port 36, which is a variation start condition of the special map 1 display device 51. ,lighting blinking)
To display.
The second memory display unit 54 is a normal variation winning device 37 which is a variation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52.
The number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to
Blinking).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first gaming state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps and the like. For example, when the player is in a gaming state in which the left hitting is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting (normal hitting), all LEDs are turned off and left. When the right hitting is more advantageous for the player than the hitting (in the right hitting), all the LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (
In the normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and when the jackpot probability state is the high probability state (probability change state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU section 110 having the same, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like. ..

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, DC5 generated by the power supply device 400 are included in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC that generates a DC voltage of DC 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter or a DC-DC converter for generating a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the gaming microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 at the time of power failure;
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even after the power is supplied to the built-in RAM) or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about a game even when a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and the game can be restarted based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. It constitutes a game information storage holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the second half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the second half variation group table, the second half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A game state in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result form by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result form (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of the left, middle, and right (for example, the same Status that has become identification information,
However, the special result mode is excluded), and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects having different possibility of deriving the special result mode (different expected values), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It has become higher in order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random pattern generation for generating various random patterns for determining the reach and the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A executes the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit or out), the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, Based on the number of starting memories and the like, any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the big winning opening switch 38a in the first special variation winning device 38, the big winning opening switch 39a in the second special variation winning device 39, the gate switch in the universal start gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball outlet switch 38e arranged in the first special variation winning device 38, an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished the game. Connected to the
An interface chip (proximity I) that receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
/F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I/F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is detached from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the occurrence of the abnormal condition and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 3 are included.
The detection signal of 4a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the gaming machine 10,
The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit has a key hole for inserting the setting key,
The setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it has been turned to the second position. The setting key switch 152 is turned on when it is turned to the second position and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability value that gives a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, you can select the probability setting value to which the probability value that will be a special result is assigned in the special figure variation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, press the R key with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position.
By turning on the power of the game machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode in which the probability setting value can be changed is entered, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode ( The probability setting value can be changed by pressing the button. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability setting value information while operating the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value changing mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode), and other than that. Displays the calculated base value and character ratio.

Further, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
By turning on the power of the gaming machine with (2 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is configured to display the probability setting value by numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability setting value may be used. Also, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used,
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode, emission color, or the like of one or a plurality of LEDs.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are the main board 100.
Is also supplied to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in a signal based on the above) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is input to the ports 122, 123,
It is not supplied to 124 and 126. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is made so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. It should be noted that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as they are are once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game As an error signal indicating that the machine is not in the game control state, it is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-shooting test apparatus through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first special winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variation winning device 38, and a second big winning opening solenoid (large for opening the second special variation winning device 39). Winning hole solenoid 2) 39b, first special variable winning device 38
The operation data of the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member therein and the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variation winning device 37 are output, and the display data of the performance display device 153 for displaying the currently selected probability set value is displayed. It is a port for outputting.
In addition, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. Of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the universal electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving and displaying a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 to generate and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e has a power source voltage of D in order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V.
C5V is supplied from the power supply device 400.
The second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 has DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal variation winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the main frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 etc. are micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111.
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a, 19b
Is equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321, which is a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain the stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure
A RAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338, which is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.), are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, and outputs V
The DP 312 is instructed on the content of the output video, the sound source LSI 314 is instructed to reproduce sound, the decoration lamp is turned on, the motor and the solenoid are controlled to be driven, and the effect time is managed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
To the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of interrupt signals INT0-n and command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 are changed to the production control command signal (production command). ) As. Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
Operates at 5V DC, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3V DC, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board production device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. which enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. To detect the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311;
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
32V for driving a motor and a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor and an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic components controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage, such as DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating or DC1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SANDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

That is, the effect control device 300 is a sub-control unit that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100, and controls the effect based on the effect information (command) transmitted from the game control device 100. It forms the production control means. Further, the CPU 311 constitutes an effect operation processing unit which is an operation processing unit for performing an operation process for effect, and an effect information storage unit having an effect information storage area in which the RAM 322 stores the effect information received.

Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 will be described with reference to FIG. This payout control device 200 has a CPU section 210 having a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 made up of an amusement chip (IC) like the gaming microcomputer 111, and an input section 22 having an input port.
0, an output unit 230 having an output port and a driver, a CPU unit 210 and an input unit 220.
And a data bus 240 for connecting the output section 230 and the output section 230.

The CPU unit 210 includes a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and an oscillation circuit (a crystal oscillator that generates a reference clock of a random number generation circuit). ) 213 and the like.

The payout microcomputer 211 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 211A.
, Read-only ROM (read only memory) 211B and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 211C is provided. Further, the payout microcomputer 211 generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 211A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 213. It is equipped with a clock generator.

The CPU 211A executes the control program in the ROM 211B, and the game control device 1
Based on the payout command (prize ball command) from 00 or the input of a ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, control is performed to discharge a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls, ball lending) from the payout device.

The ROM 211B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 211C is used as a work area of the CPU 211A and a storage area of various signals during game control. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 211B or the RAM 211C.

The input unit 220 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I/F) 221. The proximity I/F 221 has a frame radio wave sensor 84 provided on the front frame 12 for detecting the emission of radio waves.
, The payout ball detection switch 81 for detecting the game ball to be paid out is connected, and the proximity I/
The F221 converts a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. In this way, the proximity I/F 22
1 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 221 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

Since the input range of the proximity I/F 221 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are illegally shorted, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector,
It is possible to detect an abnormal condition where the lead wire is cut and becomes floating,
It is configured to output the abnormality detection signal 1.

The output of the proximity I/F 221 is supplied to the input port 223 and read by the payout microcomputer 211 via the data bus 240. Further, in the input port 223, a shoot ball out switch 82 for detecting a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow for detecting that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full) The detection signal of the switch 83,
A communication signal from the card unit 600 connected via the photo coupler 226 is also input. The input port 223 also receives an operation signal from an error release switch 227 provided in the payout control device 200 and for releasing an error caused by detection of radio waves or the like.
The detection signal of the payout ball detection switch 81 in the output of the proximity I/F 221 is the relay board 9
It is also designed to be supplied via 0 to a test shot test device (not shown).

The data stored in the input port 223 is stored in the payout microcomputer 211 through the input port 223.
The enable signal CE2 is asserted (changed to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the read address.

In addition, the payout control device 200 relays a touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24, which is output from the launch control device 700, and outputs it to the game control device 100. In addition, the payout control device 200 relays the launch permission signal output from the game control device 100 and outputs it to the launch control device 700.

Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 225 for inputting a reset signal from the power supply device 400 and a payout command (prize ball command) from the game control device 100 to the payout microcomputer 211 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 225 has a function of removing noise from these input signals.

The reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 225 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the payout microcomputer 211 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 230. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input port 223 of the input unit 220. Immediately before the reset signal RST is input, the output unit 2 is set by the payout microcomputer 211.
The data set in each port of 30 must be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but immediately before the reset signal RST is input, the pay-out microcomputer 211 from the input port 223.
This is because the data read by is discarded by resetting the payout microcomputer 211.

In addition, in the payout control device 200, DC32V and DC12V generated by the power supply device 400
, DC5V such as DC5V is supplied, and electronic components such as the payout control device 200 and the payout motor 91 driven by the payout control device 200 can be operated. Further, the DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is also supplied to the firing control device 700 via the payout control device 200.

The output unit 230 includes a first output port 231 that is connected to the data bus 240 and outputs the firing permission signal 2 as a data signal to the firing control device 700. Fire control device 70
The launch permission signal generated by the game control device 100 and the launch permission signal 2 generated by the payout control device 200 are input to 0, and at least one of them outputs the signal of the firing prohibition. If it is, it is set to the prohibited state and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.
Further, from the first output port 231, the payout control device 200 is provided, and the payout control device 2 is provided.
A data signal for controlling the error status display device 250 that displays the error generated in 00 by the lighting state of the LED is also output.

The output unit 230 is also connected to the data bus 240 and includes a second output port 232 for outputting a data signal to the game control device 100. From the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 via the second output port, a frame radio wave incorrect signal indicating that the frame radio wave sensor 84 provided on the front frame 12 has detected a radio wave, the payout control device 200. A payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are output.

Further, the output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240, and a third output port 233 for outputting an operation data signal of the payout motor 91 of the payout device, a data signal to an external device, and a data signal to the card unit 600. Is provided.

Further, the output unit 230 receives a motion data signal of the payout motor 91 output from the third output port 233 and generates a motor drive signal and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 236.
Is provided. In addition, an external information signal supplied from the third output port 233 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal board 71, and a data signal supplied from the third output port 233 to the card unit 600 is output. Two drivers 237 are provided. The required power supply voltage is supplied to these drivers.

The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store.
Information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to an external device. Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a photocoupler 238 for transmitting a data signal to the card unit 600.

Further, the output unit 230 is configured so that a fourth output port 234 that is connected to the data bus 240 and outputs various signals to a test-shooting test device (not shown) of an accredited organization via the relay board 70 can be mounted. The fourth output port 234 is a component that is not mounted on the payout control device 200 of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a gaming shop.

Further, the output unit 230 is provided with a photo coupler 239 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 239
Are configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the payout microcomputer 211 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal included in the payout microcomputer 211, as in a general-purpose microprocessor, a port such as the input port 223 is not provided.

That is, the payout control device 200 is a sub-control unit that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100, and controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control device 100. It forms the payout control means. In addition, the CPU 211A forms a payout calculation processing unit that is a calculation processing unit that performs calculation processing for payout, and the RAM 211 is provided.
The payout information storage means has a payout information storage area for storing the payout information received by C.

FIG. 6 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the jackpot type distribution probability when the big hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. In addition, "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory,
In this specification, the terms have similar meanings.

The value of the jackpot probability (probability value), which is the probability of being a jackpot (first special result),
, The probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are the probability values as shown in FIG. 6A.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the same probability value is assigned as a probability value in the high probability state to all of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, but different probability values are set. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the same probability value is assigned to “setting 1” and “setting 2” as probability values in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4” and “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of stages is not limited as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple stages. In addition, the same probability value may be assigned as a probability value in the low probability state to all of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

In addition, the effect distribution may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" in which the assigned probability values in the low probability state are the same. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4” and “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, six probability setting values (“setting 1” for three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state)) “-“Setting 6”) are assigned, but three probability setting values (for example, “Setting 1”) are set for three types of probability values.
~"Setting 3") may be allocated and the remaining three probability setting values (for example, "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may be unused.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in a special game state based on a big hit (first special game state), a game ball flows into a specific region (probability change operating region) of the first special variation winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d. By doing (passing V), it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and becomes a low probability state when winning the falling lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 6(b).
Further, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 6(c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not overlapped and won. In this embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be provided in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, when the small hits are provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or in the special figure 2 rather than the special figure 1. May be higher, or the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

In addition, FIG. 6D shows jackpot types that can be selected in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
Special figure 1 The types of big hits (first special results) in the variable display game are 10R probability change big hits and 4
There are 3 types of R probability variation big hit and 10R normal big hit. Similarly, there are three types of big hits (first special results) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R certainty change big hits, 4R certainty change big hits, and 10R normal big hits. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot random numbers. The number of each jackpot type shows the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and tends to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the special game state ends. , Normal indicates that a game ball is unlikely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is unlikely to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variation winning devices 38, 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the actual number of rounds + the number of rounds for which the opening time of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 is short and the winning control is not actually performed). May be.

Further, the first special result may be provided in which the possibility of the game ball flowing into the specific region is lower than that of the probability variation big hit, but the possibility of the game ball flowing into the specific region is higher than that of the normal big hit.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is reached is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into a specific area (probability change operation area), so even if the jackpot type is a certain change, it is specified. If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur. Even if the big hit type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

7(a) to 7(c) show the manner of opening in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 10R probability variation big hit, the V special long opening is performed in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round.
The V open long open is an open mode in which the game ball is highly likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area). Then, in the second and subsequent rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and the V-free long opening is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7(b), in the 4R probability variation big hit, the first special variation winning device 3 in the first round.
8 is opened and a specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened. Then, from the second round to the fourth round, the first special variable winning a prize device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and the V is long opened, and after the fifth round, the first special variable award winning device 3 is opened.
8 is opened, but a specific area is not opened. The V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility of a game ball flowing into the special winning opening is lower than that of the V-free long opening. That is, the V-less long opening is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and the winning ball is not actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), in the 10R normal big hit, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a V-shaped short-circuit opening for opening a specific region (probability change operating region) is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) with V, and the short opening is an opening mode lower than with V and the long opening. After the second round, the V-free long opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 is performed.
It is V that is performed in the first round that the game ball can flow into the specific area (probability change operation area).
Yes Long open and V Yes Short open only. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is a round in which the game ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Also,
The specific round may be repeated multiple times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the V-less long opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (
The first special variable winning device 3 if any of the conditions of winning 9 game balls is established.
Close 8 to end the round (t12). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper special winning opening is started (t12), and when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper special winning opening ends, the interval time starts (
At t13), when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 8B, in the V-long opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38
While turning on f, the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and the game ball cannot enter, and when the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can enter. Becomes Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is valid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the specific area switch 38d detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 m seconds after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened may flow into the specific area.

When 200 msec has passed from the start of the round, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t
34). Then, after 2700 msec has passed, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), when the condition that either the openable time of 25000 msec has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. (T39). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize hole is started (t39), the interval time is started when the processing time for the upper prize hole remaining balls is finished (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time is ended (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

In addition, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variation winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d becomes effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is a sufficiently long time of opening and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so that the game ball almost certainly flows into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the type of jackpot is probable, it will almost certainly be a high-probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept in the ON state for a predetermined time even after the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variation winning device 38 just before closing. The game balls that have been played can also flow into a specific area. It should be noted that the first special variation winning device 38 can be obtained by elapse of the openable time or by winning a predetermined number of game balls.
Is closed, and if all the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time, the lever solenoid 38f is accompanied by the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41). Is turned off to end the operation, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or the predetermined number of game balls winning, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is the upper winning hole remaining ball processing time. When not completely discharged, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end (t43) of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge is completed. And the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is the upper prize hole remaining ball processing time. If not all are discharged by the end (t43) of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43). Then, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is completed. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 8C, in the V-opened short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variation winning device 38 in the V-opened long opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round is finished based on (t54). The opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is for a very short time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time. Therefore, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the specific area. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the type of jackpot is normal.

In addition, the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid/invalid switching of the specific area switch 38d are the same as those in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 ( t55 to t63). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even after the upper winning hole remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state at the time when the discharging of the remaining ball is completed. Then, the operation ends and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 3
At the end of the period in which 8f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state and the operation is terminated, and after the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state (t62).
, 100 ms, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened for the first time (t31 to t34) in the V present long opening shown in FIG. 8B, and the first special variation in the V present short opening shown in FIG. 8C. The opening (t51 to t54) of the winning device 38 is an opening time such that at least one game ball can be won in the first special variation winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 8D, in the V-less short opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t71), and the openable time of 200 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). ) If any of the conditions for winning the game ball is established, the first special variation winning device 38
To close the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of winnings, which are the closing conditions, are generated, and most of the time, the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper special winning opening is started (t72), the interval time is started when the processing time for remaining upper special winning balls is finished (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time is ended (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, FIG. 7D shows an opening state in the second special game state (a special game state based on a small hit). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started,
When the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, and 160
The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when either the openable time of 0 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won. After that, when the small hit remaining ball processing time is started and the small hit remaining ball processing time is ended, the small hit ending time is started, and when the small hit ending time is ended, the second special game state is ended. The second
There may be a plurality of types of opening/closing modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the special game state, and in that case, which opening/closing mode is set (adopted) is determined based on the small hit symbol, for example.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (shift) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9: is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST.
There are three. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on a first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on a second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each gaming state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the gaming control device 100 is derived, the rendering mode controlled by the rendering control device 300 to determine the rendering mode of the game, and the main in the gaming state. The main starting area which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variation special figure which is the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed mainly, and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim at winning at the starting winning port 36 by left-handed striking, and at the normal variable winning device 37 by right-handed striking. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's intention. Further, in each gaming state, it is designed assuming that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game mainly advances the game, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured that it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game mainly in one special figure variation display game that is determined to be the main one in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal gaming state ST1, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no special electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate the winning, and there is no special figure variation display game or normal This is a state in which there is no time reduction for reducing the variation time of the figure variation display game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation. In this normal gaming state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win a small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. ..

The second specific game state ST3 is a state where the special figure probability is basically low. However, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 (when there is V passage) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, the state becomes a high probability state. In addition, there is a general electric power support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is support for POD, it will also be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special map variable display game and the PPU variable display game. The production mode that defines the production mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, and the aiming direction is the right-handed striking in order to aim at this ordinary variable winning apparatus 37.
That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high-probability state, and there is no ordinary electric power support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate the winning, and there is no special figure variation display game. It is in a state where there is a reduction in the time required to reduce the fluctuation time. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is small hit RUSH. Further, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, and the aiming direction is the right-handed striking in order to aim at this ordinary variable winning apparatus 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation.

In the present embodiment, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure variation display game in the state with the universal communication support is the same probability as the state without the universal communication support (normal probability). Without being limited to the above, it is possible to set the universal figure probability to a high probability (typical figure high probability state) higher than the normal probability (typical figure low probability state) in a state where there is universal communication support.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the state in which there is no ordinary electric power support means that the ordinary variable prize device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is shorter than that in the state where the ordinary electric prize support is provided. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and a right variation is achieved by right-handing the normal variation winning device 37. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the present embodiment, the small hit probability of special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since the probability of doing is high, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure variation display game is the small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state with the universal electric power support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the state without normal electric power support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. In the special game state based on the small hit, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 7(d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are normal variation prizes. The second device that wins the device 37, and is normally placed below the variable winning device 37.
It does not flow down to the special variation winning device 39. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, a small hit occurs frequently, but it is difficult to increase the player's ball with the small hit.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are normal variation prizes. Instead of winning the prize in the device 37, it flows down to the second special variable prize device 39 arranged below the normal variable prize device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, a small hit occurs frequently and the player's ball is increased, so the effect mode is a small hit RUSH.
Is called a mode.

Of these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because there is a universal electric power support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, and
Since the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, this is a more advantageous state for the player than the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specific gaming state ST3.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, consuming the prescribed number of games, and winning the falling lottery that is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the first special game state, the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific region switch When it is detected at 38d (when there is V passage), after the end of the first special game state, the process moves to the first specific game state ST2. On the other hand, if the probability variation big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage) In the case of), after the end of the first special game state, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is no V passage in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (with a special figure low probability Second specific game state ST
Go to 3). On the other hand, if the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and there is V passage in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability The game proceeds to the second specific game state ST3).
In addition, in the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, the normal game state ST1 is entered. Also, the first
When the falling lottery is won in the specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Also,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a win (special result). Further, when the first special game state, which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward a game area 32 from a hitting ball launching device (not shown). The game ball launched is
The game area 32 is made to flow down while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening 36.
, The normal variable prize device 37, the first special variable prize device 38 or the second special variable prize device 39, or flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. .. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, or the second special variation winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening won. Prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the launching force and shoots a game ball to the left-side game area (so-called left-handed hit) so that the starting winning opening 36 or the left side of the starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the provided general winning opening 35, and by launching a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called right hitting), the universal figure starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the first special fluctuation winning The device 38, the second special variation winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged to the right of the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed at.

In the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided, and the game area 32 is provided.
When the game ball driven in passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of memory for starting the ordinary figure is the upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the ordinary figure starting gate 34. If it is less than ), the number of memory for starting the universal figure is added (+1
1) and stores one ordinary figure starting memory in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the universal figure starting prize is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not being executed, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the most commonly stored figure start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/miss of the figure change display game. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time in the universal figure display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the universal figure variation display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the given order, the processing of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.
It should be noted that the public figure display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols,
A character pattern or the like may be used, and after it is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it may be stopped and displayed to display the result.

When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the universal pattern winning portion 37 is operated while the lighting pattern which is a special result mode is stopped and displayed, and the universal electric prize solenoid 37c is operated. Control to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the public-picture display unit 58 as a result mode of the off-going.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that is a start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the start winning opening 36 is a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).
In addition to storing up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), a second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the normal variation winning device 37, is stored. On the basis of the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random numbers The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. The number of memories of the start memory is the first memory display section 53 (special figure 1 reserved display) and the second memory display section 54 (special figure 2 reserved display) for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50. And the display device 41 of the center case 40 also displays as a decoration special figure starting memory display.

The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first starting memory, and the special figure 2 display device 52 (based on the second starting memory). A special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has the first special result (big hit). In such a case, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result (disappearance result) other than the special result. In addition, when one of the special figure variation display games is the second special result (small hit) during the execution of the one special figure variation display game, the other one until the special game state based on the small hit is finished. The special figure variation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It constitutes a first execution control means for controlling. In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100,
It constitutes a second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize device 37 (second start prize area).

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state).
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode (the small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special map 1 display 51 or the special map 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display 51 constitutes a first variation display means capable of displaying a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening 36. In addition, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in the big hit game state (first special game state).
After the end of the, the control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and there is Uden support) It is possible to do. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41
At, a decorative special figure variable display game is displayed in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed. The decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decoration special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variable display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 variably displays the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). A decorative variable display means for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. In addition, game machine 1
The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in 0, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game is higher (the probability of the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 As the variation pattern of the variation display game, a long variation having a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win the small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the left and hit the start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The time for long fluctuation is set to about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of long fluctuation may be changed according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a miss or a small hit, a long variation of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game, Special figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2
A long fluctuation may be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game by about 5 minutes.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the game control device 10
The control executed by the 0 game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 performed at a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 10, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a top address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when the interrupt occurs. Stack pointer setting process for setting (step X2
)I do. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and the higher order is 00.
h or 01h is set, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device 1 forming the main control means.
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for a program of a secondary control unit (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from 00 to start normally.
Is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer counts time using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power supply of the gaming machine is determined. Wait for the cutoff.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of power failure due to noise, etc. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents when the power was last turned off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process (step X8) of determining whether a power failure has occurred. When the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended,
Access to a readable/writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the gaming microcomputer is set. A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
11C, a CTC circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Then, the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the assumption that the RAM has abnormality regardless of whether the RAM has abnormality.

Next, it is judged whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y),
Power outage inspection area check data 2 in which the value of power outage inspection area 2 in RWM is normal (for example, A5h)
Is determined (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and power-off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16;N or step X17;N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19;N), the step is performed. Based on the state read in X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), there is an abnormality in the RAM, so a command for main abnormality error notification for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is produced on the control board (production control). Device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is a probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is shut down and restarted while changing the probability setting value,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). Thereby, in the performance display device 153,
The display as shown in FIG. 14(h) is performed. After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of signals other than the security signal are output (step X26).
, And returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27
; N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the probability setting value change mode is entered. After that, the command whose probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, on the basis of receiving the command of changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speaker 1 are performed.
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is given by outputting a voice by 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the probability setting value is cleared (step X28). As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, step X29,
The process of X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not in the on state (step X35; N
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the on state (step X43; N)
That is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 to perform the processing when the power failure is normally restored.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step X43
; Y), the process shifts to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Form a means of conversion.

If the setting key switch 152 is in the on state (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is displayed on the production control board (production control device 300).
(Step X37). In the production control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 are performed based on the reception of the command for confirming the probability setting.
Of the light, the operation of the board production device 44, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b,
Notify that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X123) of the timer interrupt process in the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
When the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends within 8 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after the mode is changed to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode. It The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, at least 5 after switching to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode.
Since it is necessary to output the security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, interruption is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the state (current state) read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is not determined based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on). Judgment based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is confirmed.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34;
If N), the process returns to step X33, and if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred with the probability setting changing flag set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 10 and 11) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process of inhibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. Process for permitting interruption (step X32
) To the process (steps X38, X55) for prohibiting the interrupt, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec). In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X123), which is a process related to the probability setting value.
) Is done. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the production control device 300, based on receiving the notification end command,
The notification being executed (the notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or the notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is ended.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting confirming flag is set. Is the area to be initialized (for example, power failure inspection area,
Power failure recovery processing (step X41) is performed in the checksum area and the area related to error fraud monitoring) to save the initial value at power recovery. The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.
After that, the command for power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, performance number information commands, screen designation commands, etc. Send a command. As the command for screen designation, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being waited for, Send the command on the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command on the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a high-probability-number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM areas other than the probability setting value are cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1 byte area of the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for displaying performance (displaying the base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, the RAM area for the game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X44. In step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area and unused area.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
.. The area to be initialized here is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, a RAM initialization command (waiting for customers) While displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command to notify the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model,
A production number information command and a support number information command, which is information on the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game with normal electric support, are also transmitted.

Next, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangement (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on
The value of is extracted and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure (hit random number) ), R as the initial value (start value) of the random number (falling lottery random number) that determines whether or not to win the falling lottery
After saving in a predetermined area of the WM (step X48), interrupts are allowed (step X4).
9). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of timer interrupt processing. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Note that each of the random numbers is a continuous numerical value within a predetermined range, and the updating method may be a counter-type updating with +1 or -1, or all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. It may be a random update. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.
In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the universal symbol, there is only one type of hit symbol of the universal symbol, but the hit symbol of the universal symbol is provided by providing the hit symbol random number. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number updating process of step X50, a process of inhibiting interruption (step X51)
Then, the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54). If no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), an initial value random number updating process (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating processing, the performance display editing processing, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number updating process (step X50), when a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step X50 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. To prevent the random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt, then update and release the interrupt.
If the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process, This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily interrupting (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X60), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is cut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and the secondary control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the start of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) The power failure is determined to have occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (
With the game control device 100), the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG.
The timer interrupt processing of is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X1
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in the predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change/confirmation process (step X123)
Then, the timer interrupt processing ends.
On the other hand, when neither the probability setting changing flag nor the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104; N), the solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are output based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Hoden solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of the actuator such as c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 of the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (shooting permission signal) indicating the launch permission state as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X106) of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer by various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step X107),
The random number update process 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switches 38a and 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass A winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X109) is performed for opening the frame and monitoring for errors such as illegal winning of the regular variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38, 39.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the first special variation winning device 38, the number of game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls (the number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a) flowing into the first special variation winning device 38. If abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the starting opening 1 switch 3
6a and start opening 2 switch 37a start opening switch monitoring processing for monitoring winning (step X
111) is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37
Various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game sphere. And special figure 1
Special figure 1 game processing (step X112) that performs processing relating to the variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) that performs processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game, and general figure game processing that performs processing relating to the general figure variable display game By performing (Step X114), a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game.
Segment LED edit processing to drive the so as to display desired contents (step X115)
I do.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality, and a process for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Illegal vibration monitoring process (step X117), which checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is any abnormality, and whether there is any abnormal discharge. The abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119) is performed. Further, an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (step X120), a game machine status command transmitting process of setting a command relating to an error occurred in the game machine (step X121), a performance display The performance display monitor control process (step X122) regarding the control of the device 153 is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 13 shows the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
23). In this probability setting change/confirmation processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (the range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X13).
1).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y)
Is set to the probability setting value display data corresponding to the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM (current probability setting value) (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is set to the second output port. It outputs to the 5th driver 138e via 134 (step X134). This allows
The performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIGS. 14(a) to 14(f).
On the other hand, if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131
, N), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (step X133),
The probability setting value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, in the performance display device 153, FIG.
The display as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the performance display device 153 includes four 7-segment display devices (7-segment type display devices) arranged side by side. In the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, the rightmost 7 segment display among the four 7 segment display shows the current probability set value, and the remaining 7 segment display shows “SET”. “” is indicated.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “0”, the current probability setting value is “setting 1”, and as shown in FIG. If "1" is displayed on the segment indicator and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "1".
Since the setting is 2", "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display at the right end as shown in FIG. 14B, and if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "2", The probability setting value of "setting 3
14C, "3" is displayed on the 7-segment indicator at the right end as shown in FIG.
If the value of the area for the probability setting value in M is “3”, the current probability setting value is “Setting 4”, so that the 7-segment indicator on the right end shows “7” as shown in FIG. 4” is displayed and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “4”, the current probability setting value is “setting 5”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. If “7” is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “5”, the current probability setting value is “setting 6”.
As shown in 4(f), "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display. Further, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is outside the normal range (abnormal value), the 7-segment indicator at the right end is turned off as shown in FIG.
For example, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “0”, the probability setting value display data is “1” in the first digit, “T” in the second digit, and “T” in the third digit. Probability setting value display data for instructing to display "E" and "S" at the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X1).
35). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Then, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal are output (step X136). In step X136, ON data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is up. Therefore, the security signal is continuously output during the probability setting value changing mode and the probability setting value confirming mode (while the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag are set).

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting confirming flag is set. Ends the probability setting change/confirmation process. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting changing/confirming process being executed is the probability setting changing/checking in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on (step X138; N)
Is input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139).
In step X139, the RAM initialization switch 1 is input in the immediately preceding input process (step X103).
When an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of 12 is detected, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends.

On the other hand, if there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y),
That is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change/confirmation processing is performed. finish. The value updated in step X140 (updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change/confirmation process.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set for three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). However, for example, “setting 1” to “setting 3” may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the area for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only be pressed, it is impossible to distinguish between the transition operation for transitioning to the probability setting value changing mode and the changing operation for changing the probability setting value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues during the probability setting value change mode, that is, when the power is turned on. When 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation, even though the operation is the transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is the off state, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is When the state is the ON state, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned is the current input process. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read by the processing is likely to be the off state. That is, when the transition operation continues even during the probability setting value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is input in the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected.
Therefore, in this case, when the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transfer operation, There is a possibility that the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the processing of step X138 is performed, and the processing of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on. I will. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 which has been continued since the power was turned on (
That is, since the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode is ignored, it is possible to prevent an unintended update.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result.
An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and a storage unit that stores one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM 111C)) and a mode in which the probability setting value is changed to a probability setting value changing mode in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the game machine is powered on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means. ) Change setting means (game control device 100), and operation of the second operation unit for changing to the probability set value changing mode (transfer operation) and second for changing the probability set value. The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (press operation in the case of the present embodiment), and the setting change means continues from the power-on of the gaming machine even in the probability set value change mode. It is configured so as not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit being operated.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit that is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value changing mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
FIG. 15 shows the starting opening switch monitoring process (step X1) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
11) is shown. In this start opening switch monitoring process, first, the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36)
Prepare a prize monitoring table (step X491), and obtain a hard random number (step X49)
Perform 2). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information regarding the winning of the winning opening that is set when the jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning of the winning winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition processing (step X49
3).

When the information regarding the existence of the starting opening winning combination is not set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. It should be noted that in this case, the information on no starting mouth winning is set.
On the other hand, when the information about the winning of the starting opening is set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state). (Step X494). Then, if the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (step X49
4; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the special figure low probability & speed saving is not in progress (step X494; N), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step X495).
, Production command setting processing (step X496) is performed.

Based on the reception of the right-handing instruction notification command, the production control device 300 gives a right-handing instruction notification that instructs the player to make a right-handed stroke by display or voice. When the player is in the specific game state or the special game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right hand, and the player does not win unless the player hits the player with the left hand. The starting winning opening 36 is in the special game state or the special game state. When a winning is detected in the inside, the right-handing instruction is informed.

Then, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X497).
, Special figure starting port switch common processing (step X498). Next, the start opening 2 (ordinary variation winning device 37) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) is performed, and a jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning of the ordinary variation winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is the information regarding the winning of the starting mouth set in this case (step X501).

When the information with the winning opening is not set based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (
In Step X501; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. It should be noted that in this case, the information on no starting mouth winning is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the start mouth winning is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), whether the electric power (normal variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the normal It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (step X502). When the universal electric power is operating (step X502; Y),
The process moves to step X504. On the other hand, if Fuden is not in operation (step X502; N)
Then, it is determined whether or not the fraudulent communication is occurring (step X503).

In the determination as to whether or not there is a fraudulent fraud, it is determined that fraud has occurred if the number of fraudulent prizes awarded to the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination determination number (for example, 5). In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred,
When there is a game ball that has won a prize in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal prize number.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When the illegal power generation is occurring (step X503; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more. In addition, when the normal telephone call is not illegal (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step X50).
5) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
FIG. 16 shows the special figure starting port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is provided.
The starting port signal output count, which is the output count to the external management device of 0, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X521). X523).
When the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is set to R.
The value is saved in the WM starting port signal output count area (step X524), and the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored, that is, the number of special figure holding (starting memory) to be updated is the upper limit value Here, it is determined whether it is less than 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255. However, when the upper limit is stored, the value is not saved after updating because it loops to 0 by updating +1.

If the number of reserved special figure to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. On the other hand, if the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (special map 1 reserved number or special map 2 reserved number) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch and the special figure holding number to be monitored is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM. (Step X529).

After that, a big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X5
30), save in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, the falling lottery random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and the RWM is selected.
The data is saved in the falling lottery random number storage area (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) (step X53).
4) If the winning is not in the starting opening 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start opening 2 (step X534; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X53) which is the prefetching process.
Perform 8). Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step X539), and an effect command setting process (step X540).
Then, the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It forms the starting memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37, and the predetermined random number is set as the second random number.
The second starting storage means is capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as starting storage.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
17 and 18 show the special figure holding information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned common process starting port switch common process. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (during the first special game state) (step X541), and if it is a big hit (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination. The process ends. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the winning in the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) is won. Is determined (step X542).

In the case of winning the start opening 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 and prefetching is performed. On the other hand, if the winning is not in the starting opening 1 (step X542; N),
It is determined whether or not it is in the special figure low probability & no time saving (in the normal game state) (step X543). Then, when the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (step X543; Y), the special map pending information determination processing is ended. That is, in the normal game state, long fluctuation is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which has a very long fluctuation time (about 10 minutes), but in this case, prefetching is not performed. On the other hand, if there is no special map low probability & no time saving (step X543; N
), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability (step X544).

When the special figure high probability is not in progress (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when it is during the special figure high probability (step X544; Y), is the value of the falling lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the common drawing starting port switch common processing within the range of the judgment value of the falling win? The determination is made (step X545). Next, a look-ahead falling lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), an effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a pre-reading big hit judging process (step X549) for judging whether or not it is a big hit is carried out by whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value (big hit low probability judgment value). If the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step X551), and prepared at step X530 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Acquired stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number (
Then, the process proceeds to step X552) and step X559. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) It is determined whether or not there is a prize (step X553).

If it is not a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start opening 2 (step X553; Y), a small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit I do. And
If the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the special figure starting port switch common processing step X535.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X557),
The process moves to step X559. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step X555;
In N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information set in step X558 is saved in the symbol information area (step). X559).

Then, the pre-read stop symbol command (corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information (
(Low probability) is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561)
I do.
Next, the high-probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and the pre-reading big-hit determination process (step X563) for determining whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit judgment value (big-hit high probability judgment value) is a big hit. I do. When the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step X565), and the special figure starting mouth switch common processing is performed at step X530. The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number thus prepared is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N)
In step S527 of the special figure starting port switch common processing, the starting port winning flag saved in step X527 is checked to determine whether the winning is to the starting port 2 (normal variation winning device 37) (step X567).

If it is not a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of a win to the starting opening 2 (step X567; Y), a small hit determination process (step X568) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. I do. And
If the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the special figure starting port switch common processing step X535.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X571),
The process moves to step X573. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step X569;
In N), the stopped stop symbol information is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability (step X573).

If it is not within the special figure high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, if the special figure high probability is in progress (step X573; Y), step X55
In the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in 9, the stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information set in step X572 is overwritten and saved (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is
Used for pre-reading of fluctuation patterns.

Then, the look-ahead stop symbol command (corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information (
High probability) is prepared (step X575), and effect command setting processing (step X576)
I do. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure holding information determination process is executed, the result determined by the big hit low probability determination value and the result determined by the big hit high probability determination value are the effect control device 3
Sent to 00.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step X578). I do.
Then, the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. The process ends. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the prefetch fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target, and the prefetch stop including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target A look-ahead variation pattern command including the symbol command and variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether it falls (whether the big hit probability state shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state)), whether it is a big hit or a small hit, , The variation pattern type) determination result (prefetch result) before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.
0 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the player is notified of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that can determine the result and variation mode information of the variable display game before the start of the variable display game, based on the startup memory stored in the startup storage unit. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a pre-judgment means. In addition, the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the starting memory is not limited to the starting winning time when the starting memory occurs,
It may be any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 19 shows the pre-reading big hit determination processing (step X in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing).
549, X563). In this pre-reading big hit determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step X581), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not the big hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (step X583). When the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
In FIG. 20, the special figure 1 game process in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (step X112)
showed that. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag which is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second special game state is executed. , Is interrupted during execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, the process moves to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variable display is performed. Performs processing related to the game. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. No, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, whether the big hit/small hit of special figure 2 is being performed,
That is, it is determined whether or not the special game state is being executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit (step Y101). Then, in the case of the big hit/small hit in the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when it is not in the big hit/small hit of special figure 2 (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific region switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Processing for monitoring and setting the special winning opening count command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the special winning opening, and for closing the special winning opening when a predetermined number of winnings are made to the special winning opening Process. In the special figure 1 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. For the special game state that is executed based on whether a big hit or a small hit occurs, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variation winning device 38, and is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (stochastic operation area). The process of setting the area passing flag is performed. A process for generating a special game state is performed based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). And special figure 1
When the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. When the value of the special figure 1 game process timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for this purpose is set in a register (step Y106).
Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y107), and a subroutine call is performed with the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).
Step Y108).

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special effect are monitored. Figure 1
Special figure 1 normal processing for setting the information necessary to perform the changing process (step Y109)
I do.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game process number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display 1 The changing process (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, setting of a fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type Special Figure 1 Processing during display (Fanfare time setting according to the special winning opening opening pattern and information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval)
Step Y111) is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, update of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the big hit round is the final round, or the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

When the special figure 1 game process number is "5" in step Y108, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round,
Special figure 1 The special winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending processing is performed.
If the special figure 1 game process number is "6" in step Y108, the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) that sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) I do.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (
(Step Y116), the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y117) relating to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid control process (step Y) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f.
118) is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is ended. The special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
21 and 22 show the special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in the big hit state, that is, the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit (step). Y131). And when the big hit of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y)
To move to step Y134. In addition, when the big hit of special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y1
31; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) are performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Processing for monitoring and setting the special winning opening count command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the special winning opening, and for closing the special winning opening when a predetermined number of winnings are made to the special winning opening Process. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variation winning device 38, and is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (stochastic operation area). The process of setting the area passing flag is performed. A process for generating a special game state is performed based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). And special figure 2
When the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. It is determined (step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal game state, the change time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is a very long time. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variable time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variable time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of times of repetition, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (for example, 60000 msec).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is registered in a register. It is set (step Y139). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y14).
0), a subroutine call by the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is “0”, the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game are set. Figure 2
Special figure 2 normal processing for setting the information necessary for processing during fluctuation (step Y142)
I do.
If the special figure 2 game process number is "1" in step Y141, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process, etc. 2 The changing process (step Y143) is performed.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type Special figure 2 display processing (setting of fanfare time according to big winning opening pattern, setting of information necessary for processing during fanfare/interval)
Step Y144) is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening A special winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round,
Special figure 2 The special winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending processing is performed.
When the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step Y141, the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process (step Y108) I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit are performed. Small hitting fanfare processing (step Y1)
49).
When the special figure 2 game process number is "8" in step Y141, a small hit mid-range process (step Y150) for setting an ending command and information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. is executed. To do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls winning in the special winning opening during the process of small hit, and the end of small hit The small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) for setting the information necessary for the process is performed.
When the special figure 2 game process number is "10" in step Y141, the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (
(Step Y153), the symbol variation control process (step Y154) relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid control process (step Y) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f.
155) is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is ended. This special figure 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game process is basically the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal process, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 2 changing display game in which the big hit or the small hit occurs until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the variation cannot be started even during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 cannot start changing (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y216), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area. (Step Y217), the special process 1 normal process is ended. Further, when the special map 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
When the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handing instruction notification has not been made (step Y202; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process (step Y20) is performed.
4) is performed to set the left-handing instruction notification flag (step Y205). The left-handing instruction notification flag is set to be cleared when the specific game state ends, whereby the left-handing instruction notification is given when the game state shifts to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206). If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), the variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process (step Y2).
08) is performed. After that, special figure 1 variation start processing (step Y209) for setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and a decorative special figure 1 pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number is prepared (step Y210). ) And effect command setting processing (step Y211).
At the time of performing the process (step Y210) of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the special figure 1 reservation number is not decremented based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is held. The reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number subtracted from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the change of special figure 1 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y21).
4). Here, the special map status indicates the state of the special map variable display game, and is 0 to 5
Is set. Special map status 0 indicates that neither the special map 1 variable display game nor the special map 2 variable display game is running, and the special map status 1 indicates that only the special map 1 variable display game is running. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit. There is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is the special game state based on the small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal processing ends.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal process, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 1 changing display game which is a big hit until the end of the special game state. It is to be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to determine this here.

If the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y238), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area. (Step Y239), special figure 2 usual processing ends. Further, when the special map 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 variation start processing (step Y225) for setting information about the special figure 2 variable display game and the like is performed, and a decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226. ) And effect command setting processing (step Y227). The process of preparing the decorative special figure reservation number command (step Y226)
The special figure 2 hold number is not decremented based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game at the time of performing, and the hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the current special figure 2 hold number. Is preparing. After that, the remaining game number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the change of special figure 2 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y23).
0). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, the special figure status is set to 2 or 3
Is set. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is ended.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is 0.
Is determined (step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special maps 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special maps 1 are changing (step Y233). If the special map 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234), and if it is not started (step Y234; N),
Performs processing related to setting the customer waiting state. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y
232; N), if Toku-zu 1 is changing (step Y233; Y) or if the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234; Y), the process proceeds to step Y238.

In the process related to setting the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y235), and the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236). Command setting processing (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

Also, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production, but By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change of the game state is transmitted. It will be possible to return to the production according to the game state earlier than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the probability state may change due to the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thereby, the performance control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

Further, by transmitting the variation start probability information command every time the special figure variation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state is performed from the reception of this command. Therefore, it is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the variation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the production control device 300 to return to the production according to the game state when restarted.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
In FIG. 25A, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y2 in the special process 1 normal process described above).
09). The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In the special figure 1 variation start processing, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of variation patterns in the special figure pending information determination processing is set (step Y241). Then R
A random number is loaded from the special drawing 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y242), and the special drawing 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y
243), a falling lottery process for randomly selecting the transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state (step Y24
4) is performed. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1).

Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the deviation information or the big hit information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop design (design information) A symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (step Y24
7) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (step Y248).

After that, the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the variation display game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y249) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y250) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. . Next, as the process number, "1" relating to the process during fluctuation of special figure 1 is set (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal related to fluctuation start of special figure 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 changing signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display unit 51
Save the initial value (here, 100 msec) of the blinking cycle timer (step Y257).
), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation of special figure 1 (step Y258), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
In FIG. 25B, the special figure 2 variation start process (step Y2) in the special figure 2 normal process described above.
25). The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In the special figure 2 variation start processing, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the variation patterns in the special figure pending information determination processing is set (step Y261). Then R
A random number is loaded from the special drawing 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y262), and the special drawing 2 falling lottery random number storing area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y
263), a falling lottery process for randomly selecting the transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state (step Y26
4) is performed. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the deviation information, the big hit information or the small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y266) is performed. Then, the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed to refer to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. The special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table which is a table in which the information of (1) is set is prepared (step Y268).

After that, the special pattern 2 which sets the fluctuation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game
The variation pattern setting process (step Y269) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y270) that sets the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation start update process (step Y271) is performed. . Next, as the process number, "1" relating to the process during fluctuation of special figure 2 is set (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 52
The initial value (100 msec in this case) of the blinking cycle timer is saved (step Y277).
), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y278), and the special figure 2 changing start process is ended.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing or special figure 2 variation start processing, information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests or informs the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Falling lottery processing]
FIG. 26 shows the falling lottery processing (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing. In the falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the falling lottery process is ended. In addition, when there is a special figure high probability (step Y581; Y).
Is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582).
). Winning the falling lottery means that the falling lottery random number matches the falling lottery determination value. The falling lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the falling lottery random number is equal to or larger than the lower limit value of the falling lottery judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the falling lottery judgment value, and the upper limit value of the falling lottery judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, it is judged that the player has won the falling lottery.

When the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, when the falling lottery is not won, the falling lottery process is ended. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
When the value of the falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, when the falling lottery is not won, the falling lottery process is ended. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the value of the falling lottery random number is not greater than the falling lottery upper limit judgment value (
Step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, the process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, a signal related to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signals are set to ON, and the jackpot 4 signals are set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the high probability & shortening of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal O
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF,
Special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time reduction state signal to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y5
86), the number without saving time is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the falling lottery process is ended. As a result, the low-probability state and the normal electric power support state are entered, and the normal game state is entered. In addition, the information about the end of the high probability state and the end of the universal communication support is adapted to be transmitted to the effect control device 300.
At 00, processing such as changing the effect mode is performed based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 27A shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y284), and if it is a big hit (step Y284; Y).
Ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information was saved in step Y281 (step Y286). Y287), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is not a jackpot (
In step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is ended. In this case, the hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 27B shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM (for 1 hold number)
The big hit random number is loaded from and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (
The number for holding 1 is cleared to 0 (step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y).
To move to step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y295; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.
When the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information was saved in step Y292 (step Y297). Y298) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value, which is a jackpot. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301), and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (
In step Y300; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is ended. In this case, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 28 shows a big hit determination process (steps Y285 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first,
The lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step Y311), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N
), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability (step Y313).

When the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). When the special figure high probability is not in progress (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is determined as the upper limit. Determine if greater than value (
Step Y316).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y31
6; N), that is, when it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a determination result (step Y
318), the big hit determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 29 shows a small hit determination process (step Y29) in the above-described big hit flag 2 setting process.
9) is shown. In this small hit determination processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and is equal to or lower than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the small lottery has been missed. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (
Step Y322).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y324), and the small hit judgment process is performed. finish.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 30, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above).
246). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1
The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y3
32). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), the stop design number which corresponds to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design save area (
Step Y334). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly changed to.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design pattern area (
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special map display (here, special map 1 display 51)
It is for setting the stop symbol in and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the special figure 1 round number. Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), obtain the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and move to step Y340. .. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y344), and the deviation stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, effect command setting processing (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special symbol 1 Stop the symbol setting process.

[Special map 2 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 31, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above).
266). The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y3).
61; Y), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) (step Y362). Next, set the special figure 2 big hit symbol table (step Y
363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected.
In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly changed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 2 stop design pattern area (
Step Y366). Stop symbol pattern is a special map display (here, special map 2 display 52)
It is for setting the stop symbol in and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 round number. Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), obtain the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and move to step Y370. .. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y37).
6). Next, the special figure 2 small hit design table is set (step Y377), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 2 stop design save area is saved (step Y378). By this processing, the small hit type is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y
379), and proceeds to step Y370.

Further, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the special symbol of the missed stopper symbol is drawn. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared and saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372).
To clear the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) 0 (step Y373), clear the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) to 0 (step Y374), 2 finishes the stop symbol setting process.

Here, the relationship between the stop design pattern and the decoration special drawing command (decoration special drawing 1 command, decoration special drawing 2 command) will be described. 32A, the ROM 111 of the game control device 100.
The decoration special drawing command table which defined the relationship between the stop design pattern stored in B and the decoration special drawing command was shown. The name of the stop symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern * (* is a number)", and numbers are sequentially assigned from 0. This number is called a stop symbol number, and is a unique number that is a unique number for each stop symbol pattern.

In FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, the stop symbol number corresponding to the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number or the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number is selected in the case of a big hit, and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is selected in the case of a small hit. A corresponding stop symbol number is selected, and in the case of a loss, a stop symbol number of the loss is selected. Special figure 1 big hit design random number, special figure 2 big hit design random number and special figure 2 small hit design random number is the numerical value of consecutive specified range, from this the stop design number which corresponds to the numerical value which is extracted at random is selected It is like this. By making these symbol random numbers into a numerical value in a continuous predetermined range, it becomes easy to understand the definition of the random number update process and the association with the stop symbol, and the handling becomes easy in the development of the program.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is one kind of small hit, it is not necessary to use the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number, but when there are plural kinds of small hits, the value of the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number The stop symbol number will be selected based on. Further, regarding the deviation, although it is not selected by the pattern random number, it can be said that the selection is made by the big hit random number that results in the deviation. The big hit random number is also a numerical value in a continuous predetermined range, and the result of the special figure variation display game is selected based on the numerical value randomly extracted from this.

The stop symbol number is a continuous value from 0 to 7, whereas the value of the command associated with each stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous value. This is the production control device 3
00 is commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, and has data corresponding to all the information that can be transmitted from the usable game control device 100. is there.

The plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted include, for example, those of the same model but having different specifications such as a jackpot probability. In this case, there are some parts that are common to the selectable effects and types of jackpots, but there are also different parts, and all data is stored in the effect control device 300, and the game control device 100 corresponds to the one that it uses. Only the information that has been sent will be sent. Of course, game control device 10 with different specifications of the same model
The game control device 100 is not limited to 0, and may be usable in another type of game control device 100 as long as all data of the game control device 100 to be used is stored.

FIG. 32B shows a table defining the relationship between the stop design and the decoration special command stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300. The production control device 300 has 00
A stop symbol is assigned to each of the consecutive command values from H to 0FH. In the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, only the seven stop symbols are used, and the stop symbols shown by hatching are not used. The shaded stop symbol is used in another game control device 100 in which the type of information to be transmitted is different.

That is, in the group in which the type of information is the stop symbol, the value of the command associated with each of the plurality of information included in one group is within the range (here, 00H to 0FH) defined by the group. It is a value, and the range is set to be the number of types of information (16 here) included in the group that can be used by a plurality of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted. Further, here, the range of command values and the number of types of information match, but the range of command values may be wider and may include values of commands that are not used. The value of the command that is not used is a reserve value, and if it is used when the number of stop symbols increases in the process of development, it is not necessary to change the value of the command of other groups, and the efficiency of program development is improved. You can

In this way, in the effect control device 300, all stop symbols that can be set in the usable game control device 100 are defined, and decorative special figure commands are assigned to these to be continuous values. As a result, it is possible to use it in a plurality of game control devices 100 without changing the data of the effect control device 300, and the versatility is enhanced. If the stop design stored in the effect control device 300 is used in the design stage of the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 is used.
There is no need to change the data of and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In the game control device 100, only the stop symbols used by itself are defined, and the stop symbol numbers are assigned so that they are consecutive numbers. Then, the stop symbol number, which is the value of the continuous predetermined range, is selected based on the symbol random number and the jackpot random number which are the values of the continuous predetermined range.
As described above, since the information of consecutive values is used in the processing inside the game control device 100, the design of the control processing becomes easy. For example, by making the stop symbol numbers consecutive numbers, it is not necessary to consider the missing number in other processing of the game control device 100 that refers to the stop symbol numbers, and the design becomes easy. It should be noted that when the number of stop symbols increases or decreases at the design stage, it is necessary to change the stop symbol number, but since there are few types of stop symbols, the work is easy.

As shown in FIG. 32( b ), in the effect control device 300, the decoration special figure command is assigned so that the values of the stop symbols in the effect control device 300 become continuous values. Therefore, in the game control device 100, the value of the decoration special figure command transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 is converted by the decoration special figure command table so as to be a value according to the definition in the effect control apparatus 300. . That is, each control device can handle information as continuous values in its own processing. Then, when the information is transmitted to another control device, the conversion process is performed so that the value has a value according to the definition at the transmission destination. This facilitates the design of the program in each control device.

FIG. 33 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. Each program list of the game control program executed by the game control device 100 is an 8-bit microprocessor Z80.
Is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) similar to that, except for pseudo instructions (instructions for the assembler) and the like, a pair of machine language instructions (machine code) stored in the ROM 111b (game control program storage means). Corresponds to 1.

From the left side, the description of the instruction (code) in each program list is a "line number" added for convenience, a "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (computation content) of the instruction, an "operand" of the instruction target, and a description facility. It is divided into "comments" attached for. Unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction), the instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (smallest to largest).

The codes in the line numbers 1020 and 1030 correspond to the processing in step Y331, determine whether or not the big hit flag is stored in the big hit flag 1 area, and branch the processing according to the result of the judgment. The code in line number 1060 corresponds to the processing in step Y332, and loads the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number into the A register. After that, the processing etc. which select the stop design number from the special figure 1 big hit design random number are done.

The codes in line numbers 1230 to 1280 correspond to the processing in steps Y340 and Y341. At line number 1230, the HL register is loaded with the start address D_TZ_COM of the decoration special view command table shown in FIG. 32A, and at line number 1240, the stop symbol pattern (stop symbol number) is loaded into the A register. By the process of line number 1250, the command value corresponding to the stop symbol number is stored in the A register, and the command value of the A register is loaded into the C register at line number 1260. This command value is a value corresponding to ACTION of the decoration special figure 1 command.

At line number 1270, the value corresponding to MODE of the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded into the B register, and at line number 1280, the values of the B register and the C register are saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area. At line number 1290, effect command setting processing is performed. By the above processing, the stop symbol number is converted into the decorative special figure 1 command and transmitted to the effect control device 300.

In the above description, the effect control device 300 can be commonly used in a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, but the effect control device 300 is only used in the single game control device 100. It may be usable. Even in this case, the game control device 100 concerned
Data corresponding to a value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the device may be held. Further, even when the effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, a value that can be transmitted from all available game control devices 100 ( Data corresponding to values other than (command) may be held.

As described above, the value ((
As a case where the data corresponding to a value other than the command) is held, there is a case where the production control device 300 keeps the data that is no longer used in the development process. In addition, a case where a part or all of the data of the effect control device 300 is used as a common specification and a part of the data required according to the game machine used is used is also cited. In this way, the production control device 300
By retaining the data corresponding to the value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100, it is possible to save the trouble of deleting or rearranging the data and improve the development efficiency. You can

Even when the data corresponding to the value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100 is held, the game control device 100 in the effect control device 300 for each stop symbol pattern. While using the value of the associated command, the stop symbol numbers used in its own processing should be consecutive values, for example, the command and the stop symbol number as shown in FIG. 32 are associated. Then, the value of the command is also associated with the data not used by the corresponding game control apparatus 100 (the shaded portion in FIG. 32B), and the value is not used by the game control apparatus 100 as a command. Value (eg 0
Although it is 5H), it is a value within a range (00H to 0FH) pre-allocated as a command range for the group to which the data belongs.

From the above, a game that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, creates a state advantageous to the player It is provided with a control means (game control device 100) and a subordinate control means (effect control device 300) that performs control based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means preliminarily transmits each of the transmittable information. The information (for example, stop symbol information) is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control means using the associated value (command), and the information is classified into a group defined by the type of information, and is grouped into one group. The value associated with each of the plurality of pieces of information included is a value within the range defined for each group, and only some of the values within the range are used. Therefore, by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for one group, it is not necessary to change the value of other groups even if the number of information increases at the design stage, and the efficiency of development is improved. Can be increased.

In addition, the range of values is set to be equal to or greater than the number of types of information included in the group, and only the value corresponding to the information used by itself is used among the values in the range. . Therefore, by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for one group, it is not necessary to change the value of other groups even if the number of information increases during development, and the efficiency of development can be improved. Can be increased.

In addition, the range of values is a range that is equal to or greater than the number of types of information included in the group that can be used by a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, and the value within the range is used by itself. It means that only the value corresponding to the information to be used is used. Therefore, by allocating a range of values larger than the number of information used for one group, even if the number of information increases in the development of a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, other groups There is no need to change the value of and development efficiency can be improved.

In addition, the sub-control means is configured to perform control using one data corresponding to the value transmitted from the game control means from among a plurality of held data, and the data corresponding to one group As a result, the number of pieces of data stored in the group is larger than the number of values that can be transmitted from the game control means. Therefore, the data of one slave control unit can be commonly used. In the development, whether or not the data can be used can be selected within the range of the data, and the development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the sub-control means can be commonly used by a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, and holds data corresponding to all the values that can be transmitted from the plurality of game control means. Become. Therefore, one slave control means can be used in common, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, the information included in the group and used by itself can be given a unique number that is a continuous number apart from the value, and processing related to the game can be executed using the unique number. When selecting one information from each information included in the, the random number is extracted from the numerical value of the continuous predetermined range, the lottery process of selecting the unique number based on the number is performed, and selected by the lottery process. This means that the processing relating to the game is executed based on the unique number thus obtained, and the value corresponding to the unique number is transmitted to the slave control means. Therefore, by using consecutive numerical values and unique numbers in the processing inside the game control means, it is possible to facilitate the handling of the program of the game control means during the development and improve the development efficiency.

Further, the sub-control means associates a continuous value within the range with the information included in one group, and the game control means converts the unique number into a value associated in the data of the sub-control means. The conversion process is performed, and the value obtained by the conversion process is transmitted to the slave control means. Therefore, by using consecutive values in the processing inside the slave control means, it is possible to facilitate the understanding during the development of the program of the slave control means and improve the development efficiency. In other words, the game control means and the sub-control means perform processing by using continuous numerical values in the internal processing, and when transmitting information, convert it to a value according to the definition of the destination. I am trying to send it.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special map 1 information setting process (step Y24) in the above-mentioned special map 1 variation start process.
7) is shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is set.
After obtaining the latter half offset data (step Y402), the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1
It is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403).
If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If it is not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 holding number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

Then, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405).
), the special figure 1 information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The variation allocation information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including no reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group.
As described above, in the special figure 1 variable display game, in the case of the deviation, only the first half variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number, and in the case of a big hit, the special figure 1 hold number is considered. Instead, the fluctuation pattern is determined.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
In FIG. 35, the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process.
7) is shown. In the special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time saving (in the normal gaming state) (step Y421). Special map low probability & no time saving
In step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427).
.. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game to be started is 100 from the end of the special game state.
In the case of the special figure variation display game for the second time (the number of times of support), it is determined to be the final time variation variation.

If it is the final variation in time reduction (step Y427; Y), step Y42
Move to 8. If it is not the final time shortening fluctuation (step Y427; N), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424),
The process moves to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is present (step Y427). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variable display game to be started is won, it is determined that the high probability final fluctuation.
If it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y427; Y), the first-half offset data and the latter-half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (step Y428), and step Y
Move to 425.
If it is not the high-probability final change (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). And, when it is not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y42
9; N), the low-probability special figure 2 deviating/small hitting first half offset data is set (step Y430), and the special figure 2 long variation offset second half offset data is set (step Y432).
), and proceeds to step Y425.

If the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for low figure special figure 2 big hit is set (step Y431), and the latter half offset data for special figure 2 long fluctuation is set. Yes (step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

Then, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426.
), and the special figure 2 information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The variation allocation information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including no reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 2 pending number.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the special figure 1 variation start process described above. The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern that is the variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state and the second half variation that is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set. Then, the variation pattern is selected.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and the addresses of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 are acquired and prepared (step Y452). The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of FIG. 1 and prepared (step Y453).
Next, it deviates from the special figure 1, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the disengaged stop symbol pattern (step Y454).
Byte allocation processing (step Y455) is performed. If the special map 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), a distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different between the hitting and the deviating groups. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. Since the hit occurrence rate is lower than the outfall occurrence rate and one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hit, and in order to enable more various effects, the size for deviation is 2 bytes in size.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of special figure 1. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
(Step Y463), the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) of Toku-zu 1 and prepared (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired (step Y466). By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set. Then, the first half variation number and the second half variation number are added to generate a variation pattern number (step Y467), and the variation pattern number is saved in the variation pattern number area (step Y46).
8) and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is ended. As a result, the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y471), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472), The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of FIG. 2 (step Y
473).

Next, it deviates from the special figure 2, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the disengaged stop symbol pattern (step Y474).
Byte allocation processing (step Y475) is performed. If the special map 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), a distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Then, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
(Step Y483), the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2 and prepared (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired (step Y486). The first half variation pattern is set by this processing. Then, the first half variation number and the second half variation number are added to generate a variation pattern number (step Y487), and the variation pattern number is saved in the variation pattern number area (step Y4).
88) and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is ended. Special figure 2 which will be started by this
The variation pattern for the entire period of the variable display game is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250 and Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the fluctuation pattern number correction table is set (step Y552), the subtraction value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired (step Y553), and the subtraction value is subtracted from the fluctuation pattern number to correct (step Y554). After that, the fluctuation time value table is set (step Y555), and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the corrected fluctuation pattern number is acquired (
(Step Y556), the variable time value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, a long variation is set for which the variation time is very long. In this case, the added value is the specified time (here, 60000 m
The remaining time (excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times
(Time less than 60,000 ms) is calculated as an additional value.

Then, it is determined whether the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y558). If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. If the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step Y558; N), that is, if the information of special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the special display 2 variation display game is in the normal game state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, when the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not started (step Y559; N), 0 is set.
It is saved in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (step Y560). In addition, special figure 2
If it is the start of the long fluctuation (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the variation pattern number before correction is prepared (step Y562), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number before correction is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command is set. The process (step Y564) is performed. Next, the target number of reservations is updated by -1 (step Y566), the content of the target random number storage area is shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and fluctuation start information setting is performed. The process ends.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set in the long fluctuation of FIG. 2 in order to change the time that is not sufficient with the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the addition result is 600
Save the timer of 00msec, the number of repetitions of 9, and subtract the timer by timer interrupt processing. When the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 and the game processing timer becomes 60000m.
Set the second. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation in Special Figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60000 ms ×
10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, 2 bytes can be set up to about 262 sec. However, for ease of understanding, it is represented by multiplication of 60 sec.

Here, details of the process of acquiring the variation time value from the selected special figure variation pattern will be described. FIG. 39 shows a fluctuation time value table defining the relationship between the special figure fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time value. The name of the special figure variation pattern is “special figure variation pattern* (* is a number)”, and numbers are sequentially assigned from 1. This number is called a fluctuation pattern number, and is a unique number that is a unique number for each special figure fluctuation pattern. Fig. 36
37, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the value obtained by adding the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number selected by the fluctuation pattern random number is selected.

In the present embodiment, some of the numbers are missing, such as special figure variation patterns 30 to 33. In FIG. 39, a blank is provided so that the missing number portion can be easily understood, but there is no blank in actual data, and the blank is stored. At the beginning of development, there are no missing numbers and special figure fluctuation patterns exist, and the fluctuation pattern numbers are assigned in order from 1 for each special figure fluctuation pattern.
The missing number occurred because the special map variation pattern was deleted in the subsequent development process. Since there are such missing numbers, the game machine according to the present embodiment has up to 70 special figure fluctuation patterns, but the number of special figure fluctuation patterns is 70. By deleting and packing unused data in this manner, the area of the ROM 111B can be used efficiently without waste.

As described above, in selecting the special figure variation pattern, the variation pattern number is calculated from the first half variation number and the second half variation number. Therefore, if the variation pattern number is changed along with the deletion of the special figure variation pattern, the first half variation number and the second half variation number also need to be changed, and the correction work becomes complicated. In particular, the special figure variation pattern is larger in number than the stop symbol pattern, and the correction work is complicated. For this reason, the change pattern number is not changed and is set as a missing number in order to improve development efficiency.

When acquiring the fluctuation time value from the fluctuation pattern number, the fluctuation time value is acquired by referring to the selected fluctuation pattern number in the fluctuation time value table shown in FIG. However, in the data stored in the ROM 111B of the game control device 100, the missing numbers are filled so as not to provide a blank line, so the special figure variation pattern number corresponding to the special figure variation pattern and There is a discrepancy between the ranks counted from the beginning of the fluctuation time value table of the special figure fluctuation pattern. For example, in the information of the special figure variation pattern 34, since the special figure variation patterns 30 to 33 are missing numbers, the order is 30th from the beginning of the variation time value table, so the order and the special figure variation pattern number. There is a gap between and. Therefore, when acquiring the fluctuation time value, the fluctuation pattern number is corrected to be a correction number, and the fluctuation time value is acquired by referring to the correction number in the fluctuation time value table.

FIG. 40 shows a fluctuation pattern number correction table for correcting the fluctuation pattern number. Since the number of missing numbers in the previous numbers differs depending on the variation pattern number to be corrected, the subtraction value is defined according to the variation pattern number to be corrected. The correction number can be calculated by subtracting the subtraction value from the fluctuation pattern number to be corrected, and this correction number becomes the rank from the beginning of the fluctuation time value table. For example, when the fluctuation pattern numbers are 34 to 51, the order from the beginning of the fluctuation time value table is obtained by subtracting 4 which is the number of the special figure fluctuation patterns 30 to 33 which are missing.

In this way, for the special figure variation pattern, the correspondence to the missing number is performed by correction processing by calculation, and for the stop symbol pattern, the correspondence to the missing number is performed by replacing the table. Since there are few stop symbol patterns, there is no problem even if they are replaced by a table. However, because there are many special figure fluctuation patterns,
If replacement is performed using a table that defines the correspondence between fluctuation pattern numbers and correction numbers for all fluctuation pattern numbers, a table with a large amount of data is required. Therefore, the special figure variation pattern is dealt with by a correction process by calculation to prevent an increase in the amount of data and to efficiently use the area of the ROM 111B.

FIG. 41 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the fluctuation start information setting process executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. The codes in line numbers 2020 to 2040 correspond to the processing in step Y551. Also, the code in line number 2090 is step Y5.
Corresponding to the processing of No. 52, the start address D_ of the fluctuation pattern number correction table is stored in the HL register.
Load HEN_NUM_REV. The codes in line numbers 2100 to 2200 correspond to the processing in step Y553, and in line number 2100, the numerical value corresponding to the label R_HEN_NUM+00H is loaded into the A register. The label R_HEN_NUM+00H indicates the address of the RAM 111C that stores the variation pattern number selected based on the random number. After that, A
The variation pattern number loaded in the register is sequentially referred to the comparison value of the variation pattern number correction table, and when it is determined in line number 2150 that it is less than the comparison value, the subtraction value of the corresponding address in line number 2200 is set to E. Load the register.

The code in line number 2210 corresponds to the processing in step Y554, and the subtraction value loaded in the E register is subtracted from the variation pattern number loaded in the A register. Line number 2220
Corresponds to the process of step Y555, and loads the start address D_HEN_TIM of the variable time value table into the HL register. The code in line number 2230 is step Y556.
The 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD is called, and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the corrected fluctuation pattern number is acquired from the fluctuation time value table. The acquired time value is stored in the HL register. The code in line number 2240 is step Y
Corresponding to the processing of 557, the variable time value stored in the HL register is loaded into the address stored in the IY register. The IY register here stores the address of the special figure game processing timer area.

The correction number obtained by the correction processing may be stored in the RAM 111C so that it can be used in other processing. Even when the correction process is performed, the variation pattern number before correction is R
It is in a state of being stored in the AM 111C. This fluctuation pattern number may be used in other processing, such as being used for transmitting information to the effect control device 300 as described below. Further, by storing it in the RAM 111C, it is possible to maintain the variation pattern number even after the variation time ends, and it is also possible to maintain the variation pattern number in the next special figure variation display game. As a result, it is possible to select the stop time according to the variation pattern number, and to select the effect of the next special figure variation display game according to the variation pattern number of the previous special figure variation display game. Can be improved.

Information on the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by transmitting the variation command set in steps Y562 and 563 of FIG. At this time, the information of the variation pattern number before correction is transmitted instead of the correction number. Specifically, the ACTI of the variable command
The ON value is used as the fluctuation pattern number. Therefore, there will be a missing number in the value transmitted to the performance control device 300.

The effect control device 300 performs the control process without correcting the fluctuation pattern number acquired from the received fluctuation command. On the data stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, the special figure variation pattern information, which is a missing number in the game control device 100, is also stored without being deleted. Therefore, the variation pattern number and the rank from the beginning in the table that stores the data corresponding to each special figure variation pattern match. Since the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 has a sufficient capacity, no problem occurs even if data corresponding to the missing special figure variation pattern is left, and the control load is reduced by not performing the correction process. Can be reduced.

The effect control device 300 is a plurality of types of game control devices 1 in which the types of information to be transmitted are different.
00 can be used in common and holds data corresponding to all the information that can be transmitted from the usable game control device 100. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation pattern which is a missing number in the game control apparatus 100 of the present embodiment is used in another game control apparatus 100 as well as the special figure fluctuation pattern which is not used in the process of development. It may be a special figure variation pattern. In any case, the game control device 100 uses the unique number (variation pattern number) attached to the data held by the effect control device 300, and treats the unique number not used by the game control device 100 itself as a missing number. Then, in the process in the game control device 100, a correction number, which is a serial number with no missing number, is calculated and used by the correction process.

It should be noted that in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, there is data corresponding to the missing special figure variation pattern, but the special figure variation pattern that is not used by any game control apparatus 100 is deleted and blank data. Also good. That is, the fluctuation pattern number and the rank from the beginning (added value of the address) in the table storing the data corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern may be in a coincident or proportional relationship.

From the above, a game that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, creates a state advantageous to the player It is provided with a control means (game control device 100) and a subordinate control means (effect control device 300) that performs control based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means preliminarily transmits each of the transmittable information. The associated value (command) is used to transmit information (for example, special figure variation pattern information) to the sub-control unit, and the information is classified into groups that are determined by the type of information. The value associated with each of a plurality of pieces of information included in the group is a value within the range determined for each group, and only a part of the values within the range is used. Become. Therefore, by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for one group, it is not necessary to change the value of other groups even if the number of information increases at the design stage, and the efficiency of development is improved. Can be increased.

Further, the group includes a variable system group that includes information about the execution mode of the game (special figure variation pattern) and a symbol group that includes information about the result mode of the game (stop symbol information). , The game control means, each time the game is started, selects one information from the information included in the variable group and transmits it to the sub-control means, and selects one information from the information included in the symbol group. This means that it is transmitted to the slave control means. The contents of these groups are often changed in the development of gaming machines, and at least by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for the groups in each of these groups, Even if the number of information increases in the design stage, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game control means for integrally controlling the game is provided in a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to the player. The information used by the game control means in the processing relating to the game is classified into groups that are determined by the type of information, and each information included in the group is given a unique number that is a different number in the information. The unique number of each piece of information included in is a discontinuous number, and the game control means corrects the unique number to be a correction number that is a continuous number in all the information included in the group. Can be executed, and processing related to the game can be performed using the correction number. Therefore, by using consecutive correction numbers in the processing inside the game control means, the handling of the game control means at the time of development can be facilitated and the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, the game control means is provided with sub-control means for performing control based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means transmits the information to the sub-control means by using a value previously associated with each piece of information. It is configured and the value is attached corresponding to the unique number. When the number of pieces of information increases or decreases at the design stage, the correction number changes but the unique number does not change. Therefore, by associating a value with a unique number, it is not necessary to change the value association due to an increase or decrease in the number of pieces of information, and it is not necessary to change the data of the slave control means, improving the efficiency of development. You can

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the first start-up memory stored in the first start-up storage means, the game control device 100 provides the result and the change mode information of the first change-display game (special figure 1 change-display game) to the start of the first change-display game. It constitutes a first determining means that can be determined previously. In addition, the game control device 100,
Based on the second starting memory stored in the second starting storage means, the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) may be determined before the start of the second variable display game. It constitutes a possible second determining means. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

From the above, the starting winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball shot to one side of the game area 32 can be won, and the normal variation winning device 37 is a game ball shot to the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information about the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the means is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the special decoration variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process.
Further, the game control device 100 constitutes second variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

In addition, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determining means, and the result and variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determining means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has passed the variation time, It constitutes a measuring means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, a long variation is set for which the variation time is very long, but in this case, information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the long variation is set. It is also possible to transmit a command indicating only that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variable display based on the reception of the command of the long fluctuation.
The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when the variation time ends, and the production control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the effect control device 300
It is possible to reduce the burden of control in.

[Time reduction change count update process]
FIG. 42 shows the time-reduced fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time shortening variation count updating process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (high probability state) (step Y571). If the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y571; Y), the time is changed. The shortened variation count updating process ends. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure is being shortened (step Y572). Then, if the special drawing is not shortening (step Y572; N
) Ends the time-reduced variation count update process. When the special drawing time saving is in progress (step Y572; Y), the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the number of times of time shortening fluctuation becomes "0" (step Y574). .

When the number of times of time shortening variation is not "0" (step A754; N), the processing of updating the number of times of time reduction variation is ended. In addition, when the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0” (step Y57).
4; Y), a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, the big hit 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575), and a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example,
Special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal is OFF, special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal is OFF,
Ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal is OFF, ordinary electric accessory 1 opening extension status signal is OFF)
Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578).
), save the universal figure time saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y579).
), and the processing for updating the number of times of shortening time reduction is completed.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 43, the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above.
showed that. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, load the command from the decoration special command 1 command area and prepare (
Step Y622) and effect command setting processing (step Y623) are performed.

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, so when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, 600 in the case of disconnection.
In the case of a big hit, a display time of 2000 msec is set.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (step Y627). If the special map 1 is out of alignment (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. If the special map 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627;
N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, and the special figure 2 being executed is
This is a case where the variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result. It should be noted that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 2 (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is incremented by 1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 set as the display time of the special figure 2 is changed. Display time+display time of 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the stop display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 deviation design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and effect command setting processing (step Y635) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), effect command setting processing (step Y638) is performed, and special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area. (Step Y640), information is loaded from the special prize 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed, and the special figure 1
The displayed process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 44, the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game process described above.
showed that. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepare (
Step Y652) and effect command setting processing (step Y653) are performed.

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 msec in the case of off, 600 msec in the case of big hit, and 136 msec in the case of small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If the special map 2 is out of alignment (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If the special map 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657;
N), that is, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

If the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). Special figure 2 If it is not a big hit (step Y65
9; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670) and a decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y671). ), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and step Y673 is performed.
Move to.

That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. It is to be noted that the variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game has already ended, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The suspended special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the result of the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It should be noted that the special display 1 variable display game is also subject to forced stop even when the variable display has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended.

When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 1 (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 is not being displayed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 is set as the display time. The display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 will end at the same time. Even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the stop display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 deviation design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and effect command setting processing (step Y666) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing (step Y668) is performed, and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether it is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit. The determination is made (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step Y675),
Special figure 2 Information is loaded from the special prize opening information area and saved in the special prize opening information area (
Step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed, and the special figure 2 The displayed process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
In FIG. 45, the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the special figure 1 game process described above.
showed that. In this special figure 1 displaying process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area by the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y7).
51), the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y752). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753).
If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal for starting the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol) Save 1 hit signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step Y754).
..

Next, a special design command corresponding to the special design 1 stop design pattern is loaded from the winning design command area to be prepared (step Y755), and the effect command setting process (step Y756).
I do. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment,
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening information (for example, 100 ms)
Is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y762), and the game number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y763). Furthermore, a fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (step Y764) is performed,
The process of displaying the special figure 1 ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, the big hit flag 1
Is a high probability final variation (step Y765), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y765; N), it is determined whether it is a time shortening final variation (step Y766). . Here, when the falling lottery for the running special figure 1 variable display game is won, it is determined that the high probability final fluctuation. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is the special figure variable display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final fluctuation.

Then, when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765; N) and when it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y765; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and a production command A setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the leftward instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and whether the small hit of special figure 2 is in progress, that is, It is determined whether or not the special game state is being executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

When the small hit in special figure 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). Thereby, the first game state display unit 5
6 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is displayed. After that, during the change of special figure 1 in the special figure status area (information subtraction) is cleared (step Y774), the special figure 1 normal process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775), and the special figure 1 The displayed process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
46 and 47 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the special figure 2 game process described above. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same process as the special figure 1 displaying process described above for the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the special figure 2 variation start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815). If the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, a special design command corresponding to the special design 2 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area to be prepared (step Y817), and an effect command setting process (step Y818).
I do. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment,
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening information (for example, 100 ms)
Is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y824), and the game number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y825). Further, a fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (step Y826) is performed,
The special figure 2 displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, the big hit flag 2
If is the outfall information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y8)
27; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y828), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y828; N), it is determined whether it is a time shortening final variation (step Y829). Here, when the falling lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the high-probability final variation. In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

Then, when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N) and when it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y828; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and a production command A setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, load and prepare commands from the hit symbol command area (step Y834),
Perform effect command setting processing (step Y835). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal relating to a right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838).
). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned on. Then, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given.
After that, the lower special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared (step Y840), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y841), and the special figure 2
The small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying processing is ended.

When the small hit flag 2 is not the small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether or not it is the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843), and when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y84).
3; N), it is determined whether or not it is the final variation in time reduction (step Y844). Here, when the falling lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the high-probability final variation. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed 100 times (from the end of the special game state)
In the case of the special figure variation display game of the (support frequency) eye, it is determined to be the final variation in time reduction.

Then, when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N) and when it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y843; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and a production command A setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y847), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first gaming state display portion 56 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. After that, the change of special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), and the special figure 2 normal process number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851). The displayed process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device is generated based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. Second special game generating means for forming a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
48 and 49 show the fanfare/interval processing (steps Y112 and Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare/interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare/interval processing is ended. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variable display game. There is.

When the game ball has not passed through the universal starting gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare/interval processing is ended. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed the universal figure starting gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. A value (10 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the upper special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared (step Y947), and the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the upper special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the ON output data of the accessory continuously operating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950).
.. Then, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

Next, a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit medium processing control pointer area (step Y954). The mouth opening information and the special winning opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In the present embodiment, V and long opening correspond. In addition, when opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (
In the case of this embodiment, 2) is set. The initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N),
The stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the process number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960). Then, in the case of the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960;
In Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y962). on the other hand,
If it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of special figure 2, the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y963), and the special winning opening time is set. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal related to the opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (
Step Y965). Here, the special electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then the first
The special winning opening on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the opening/closing member of the special variation winning device 38 (step Y966), and the number of winning openings to the special winning opening is counted. Is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare/interval processing is ended.

In the present embodiment, as shown in, for example, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, in the special game state based on the big hit (first special game state), only the upper special winning opening (first special fluctuation device 38) is opened and the small In the special game state based on the hit (second special game state), only the lower special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing mode in the first special game state may be a mode in which the upper special winning opening is opened in the first round and the lower special winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
50. In FIG. 50, the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
5) is shown. In this special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). When the time reduction determination data is no time saving in step Y1101, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and when the time reduction determination data is time saving in step Y1101, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area),
When this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process moves to step Y1106. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability change operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (10R normal big hit in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not the flow is through a specific area irregularity, which is an inflow of (step Y1107).

If it does not pass through the specific area irregularity (step Y1107; N), step Y1
Go to 109. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1107;
In Y), irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108).
) And effect command setting processing (step Y1109). The probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of step Y1109. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including information on the production mode, which is one of "high probability/time saving", "low probability/time saving", and "low probability/time saving". Yes, in the case of a probability variation operating area irregular passage, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, “0” relating to the special processing of the special figure 1 is set as the processing number (step Y1110),
The processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112).
Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, save the off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114),
Save the flag during fraudulent monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area
115) and clear the special figure status area (step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 is displayed, which indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. And the special figure 2 game wait time value (
For example, 8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

The special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2 by performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 game processing is performed by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 variable display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start first. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117,
The start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, after the game control device 100 has finished the special game state, the second variable display game execution control means sets the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game process standby unit is provided to prevent the process related to the start of the two-variable display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
In FIG. 51, the special figure 2 big hit end process in the special figure 2 game process described above (step Y14).
8) is shown. The special figure 2 big hit ending processing, step Y110 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit processing
The processing is the same except that step 9 is not performed. In the special figure 2 big hit ending process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). Step Y113
If the time reduction determination data is 1 in step 1, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1
132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data is time shortened in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 2 (step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability change operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (10R normal big hit in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not it is the inflow of the specific area irregularly (step Y1137).

If it does not pass through the specific area irregularity (step Y1137; N), step Y1
Transition to 139. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1137;
In Y), irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138).
) And effect command setting processing (step Y1139). The probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of step Y1139. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including information on the production mode, which is one of "high probability/time saving", "low probability/time saving", and "low probability/time saving". Yes, in the case of a probability variation operating area irregular passage, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special process 2 ordinary process is set as the process number (step Y1140),
The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143).
Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, save the number of lights off in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144),
Save the flag during fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper special winning opening (step Y11
45), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is ended. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 is displayed, which indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 52A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102 and 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start without time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to OFF. At this point, the data is only set and not output.

Next, the signal related to the start without time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
Then, save the number without saving time in the game status display number area (step Y1153),
Save the universal figure time saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1154).
.. Next, the special figure low probability and no time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time shortening variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first gaming state display portion 56 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. By this processing, a normal game state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 52B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103 and 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
161). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to ON. Incidentally, the big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal related to the start with the time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, save the number with time saving in the game status display number area (step Y1163),
Save the universal figure time saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164).
.. Next, the special figure low probability and time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial value is set in the time reduction variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state. The value is saved (step Y1166). In the case of the present embodiment, since the support count is 100, 100 is saved as the initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By this process, the special game low probability second specific game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-hand striking mode is set during the time saving state.
Since the right hit mode is set from the middle of the big hit, the right hit mode is not set in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 53 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal relating to the start of special time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
171). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to ON. Incidentally, the big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, save the signal related to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (
Step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON. Then, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1173).
), the special figure high probability and time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal relating to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, game status display number 2
The number in the right hit state is saved in the area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 ends. By this processing, a high probability state is achieved. In other words, by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 1, the first specific game state,
By executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 2, the special figure high probability second
It becomes a specific game state.
Through the above processing, it is possible to set the specific game state that is a high probability state after the end of the first special game state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second special game state ST3 with high special figure probability) in which the probability of the special variation display game result being a special result is higher than in the normal state. It constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
FIG. 54 shows the small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this small hitting fanfare middle processing, first, the small big winning opening opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and the effect command setting processing (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 is set for the processing during the small hit as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).
).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric auditors 2 working signal is ON) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step Y1206). And
Save the lower winning a prize opening on data to the winning a prize solenoid output data area (step Y12
07), clear the special winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings in the special winning opening (step Y1208), and finish the small hit fanfare processing.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special map 2 small hit end process (step Y15) in the special map 2 game process described above.
2) is shown. In the special figure 2 small hit ending process, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y1334), the off number is saved in the round LED pointer region (step Y1335), and the special figure status region is cleared ( Step Y1336). By clearing the special drawing status area,
The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither of them is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special map has a low probability and no time saving (during a normal game state) (step Y133).
7) If there is no special map low probability & no time saving (step Y1337; N), step Y
Move to 1340. In addition, when the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (step Y1337;
In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340).

If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (step Y1340; N),
The special figure 1 game interruption flag territory is cleared (step Y1343), the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340; Y
), a decoration special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and effect command setting processing (step Y1342) is performed. After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (
(Step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. As a result, when the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is finished, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

That is, the game control device 100 is the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 1
00) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100), the variable display game execution control means controls the execution of one variable display game.
When the other variable display game whose execution control is being performed by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one variable display game is interrupted, and the special game state based on the other variable display game is changed. A resuming control means capable of executing resuming control for resuming one of the variable display games which has been interrupted after the end is formed.

[Game machine status command transmission process]
FIG. 56 shows the gaming machine status command transmission processing (step X121) in the above timer interruption processing. In this gaming machine status command transmission processing, first, if the gaming machine status command transmission timer that manages the intervals at which gaming machine status commands are periodically transmitted is not 0, -1 is updated (step X601), and the gaming machine status command is transmitted. It is determined whether the timer has timed out (step X602).

When the gaming machine status command transmission timer has not expired (step X602; N
) Ends the gaming machine status command transmission processing. When the gaming machine status command transmission timer has timed out (step X602; Y), the timer initial value is saved in the gaming machine status command transmission timer area (step X603). Here, 16 ms is set as the initial value. This time is the same as the error monitoring cycle in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X109) which is one of the processes for monitoring the error.
Of course, other time values may be used.

Next, clear data is set as the gaming machine state command 1 (ACTION) (step X604), and the values indicating the presence or absence of each error are combined (steps X605 to X611) to generate the gaming machine state command 1 (ACTION). (See FIG. 57(a)). The status flag of each error is set in the process of monitoring the corresponding error. Then, the gaming machine state command 1 (MODE) is prepared (step X612), and effect command setting processing for setting transmission of the gaming machine state command 1 is performed (step X613).

Next, clear data is set as the gaming machine status command 2 (ACTION) (step X614), and the values indicating the presence or absence of each error are combined (steps X615 to X621) to generate the gaming machine status command 2 (ACTION). (See FIG. 57(b)). The status flag of each error is set in the process of monitoring the corresponding error. Then, the gaming machine state command 2 (MODE) is prepared (step X622), the effect command setting process for setting the transmission of the gaming machine state command 2 is performed (step X623), and the gaming machine state command transmission process is ended.

FIG. 57 shows the structure of the gaming machine status command. Information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in each bit. The most significant bit is always set to 0 to distinguish it from MODE of the command. Information regarding the presence or absence of an abnormality in the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2. The gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are transmitted periodically (here, every 16 ms).

As will be described later, in the effect control device 300, when a new command is received while the command storage area is full, the oldest command is overwritten. However, the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are periodically executed. By transmitting the status information, even if the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are discarded by overwriting, the status of the gaming machine can be sent by the new gaming machine status commands 1 and 2, and the notification of the abnormality is surely performed. It can be carried out.

The gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be periodically transmitted only when an abnormality has occurred. Further, in the case where an abnormality has occurred, only the command for notifying the abnormality that has occurred may be periodically transmitted from the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2, or both gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted. Both may be transmitted periodically.
Further, in this case, when the abnormality is resolved, the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 indicating that there is no abnormality may be periodically transmitted over a certain period. Also in this case, it is possible to periodically transmit only the command that has notified the abnormality that has occurred among the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2, or both gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted periodically. You may make it transmit regularly over a fixed period.

Further, it is possible to select whether or not to periodically transmit one or both of the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 according to the presence/absence of an abnormality, the type of abnormality that has occurred, the game state, and the like. good. Further, the transmission cycle of the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 may be selectable according to the presence/absence of an abnormality, the type of abnormality that has occurred, the game state, and the like.

Here, an example of the data structure of the ROM 111B is shown in FIG.
ROM111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is shown in FIG.
As shown in a), a program/data area in which programs and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area in which arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program can be set, a start address of a subroutine of the CALLV instruction, and a timer allocation It has a vector table area in which a table for setting the start address of the embedded processing is stored and an HW (hardware) parameter area in which parameters for setting the internal functions of the gaming microcomputer 111 by hardware are stored. ing.

In the program/data area, as shown in FIG. 58A, a program area 111Ba in which various programs are stored, a first unused area 111Bb, and a data area 111Bc in which various fixed data are stored in order from the beginning. And a second unused area 111Bd. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the second unused area 111Bd, an illegal access reset is generated.

In the data area 111Bc, as shown in FIG. 58(b), an area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, which stores the upper limit judgment value table used in the big hit judgment, and a performance display in which data related to the performance display is stored. Areas for various data such as an area A3 for data are provided. Further, an unused area A2 in which access is prohibited is provided between the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table and the area A3 for performance display in the data area 111Bc. And C
When the PU 111A accesses the unused area A2, an illegal access reset is generated.

CPU111A sets the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the present probability setting value in step X585 of the pre-reading big hit judgment processing (FIG. 19) or step Y315 of the big hit judgment processing (FIG. 28). At that time, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is used as a pointer, and R
An upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired and set from the OM 111B.
Further, the CPU 111A sets the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X584 of the prefetch big hit determination process (FIG. 19) or step Y314 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 28). At this time, the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is used as a pointer to acquire and set the upper probability determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value from the ROM 111B.

In the pre-reading big hit determination process and the big hit determination process, the process of determining whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) is not performed. for that reason,
Even when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is out of the normal range, data is acquired from the ROM 111B by using the value (abnormal value) as a pointer. Therefore, for example, in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 9, when the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, that is, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other. If there is, it may not be possible to accurately determine the big hit, which may result in an inconvenience that the big hit becomes extremely easy or the big hit becomes difficult.

Specifically, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. 59 and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is acquired from the ROM 111B. When the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “5” (within the normal range), the value is used as a pointer to determine the upper limit corresponding to “setting 6” in the low probability. The value, that is, the accurate data can be obtained. On the other hand, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “7”.
When the value is out of the normal range, by using the value as a pointer, the data stored in the area A3 for performance display, that is, erroneous data is acquired. The same applies to the case where the upper limit determination value with high probability is acquired from the ROM 111B.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58B, the area A for the upper limit judgment value table is used.
Immediately after 1, the unused area A2 was arranged. As a result, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, if the upper limit determination value is acquired from the ROM 111B by using the value as a pointer, the unused area (access prohibited area) A2 is set. Since access will be made, illegal access reset will occur. As a result, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM can be initialized and the abnormality can be notified.

Specifically, when an illegal access reset occurs, the program is restarted and the main process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is started. At that time, since the processing at the time of power failure (steps X55 to X61) is not executed before the restart, the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is not the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 in the main processing after the restart. Is determined (step X16; N). At that time, since the setting change operation (the operation of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not performed at the time of restart, in the main processing after the restart, the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated. Both are determined to be in the off state (step X21; N). Therefore, the processes of steps X25 and X26 are executed, so that the setting change operation is requested, that is, the abnormality is notified. Then, by this request (notification), the power of the gaming machine is turned on again while executing the setting change operation, so that the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is initialized ( Step X28).

As shown in FIG. 58C, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table is set to the data area 1
It may be arranged at the end of 11Bc. In this case, even if the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, an illegal access reset occurs when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range. To do. That is, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table is arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the value is used as a pointer from the ROM 111B to determine the upper limit. When trying to acquire the determination value, the second unused area (access prohibited area) 111Bd is accessed, so that illegal access reset occurs.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control means (game control device 100 (CPU111A)) for controlling the game, and the storage means (game that stores the information necessary for the control of the game by the control means). Controller 100 (ROM 111B)), and each storage area included in the area for the probability value table (the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table) among the plurality of storage areas included in the storage means is the storage area. The probability value assigned to the probability setting value corresponding to is stored in the probability setting value (the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM) stored in the storage means of the plurality of storage areas. Information (data) is obtained from the corresponding storage area, and lottery (big hit determination) of the game is performed using the information. In the storage means, information is not stored continuously in the probability value table area. Used area (unused area A2, second unused area 11
1Bd) is arranged (see FIGS. 58B and 58C).
With this configuration, when the probability setting value (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means is outside the normal range, the unused area (the unused area A2, The second unused area 111Bd) will be accessed. That is, when the accurate lottery result is not obtained, the lottery itself is not executed, so that it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the lottery is extremely easy to win or the lottery is extremely difficult to win.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 60, a timer interrupt process not shown, and a command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 61.

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 60, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Then, the generation of the display data is permitted (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is made in this effect button input process, the process of changing the effect content is performed.

Then, the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal is set, and the LED by the player is set.
Hall/player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as change of brightness of liquid crystal and liquid crystal, volume is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for setting settings for controlling the progress of the effect and editing a drawing command. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds) is created, the V blank interrupt (1/6
When 0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated at 1/60 seconds (frame switching), or the image may be updated at a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame switching). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc.). C18), a board for performing a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the board effect device 44, and controlling effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 61 shows a command reception interrupt process for storing the command transmitted from the game control device 100 in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 322. Game control device 1
The commands from 00 are MODE indicating the type of command and ACTI indicating the contents of the command.
It is constituted by ON and one combination is made by these combinations.

In the command reception interrupt processing, first, the reception monitoring timer is stopped (step C101),
The command is read from the reception buffer of the command I/F 331 that receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the register of the CPU 311 (step C102), and it is determined whether the received command is in the MODE range (step C103). ). If the received command is in the MODE range (step C103; Y), the command is received in MOD.
Save as E in the received command area provided in the RAM 322 (step C104)
.. The received command area is an area provided in the RAM 322 and is a dedicated area for temporarily storing the received command. Next, as the MODE reception flag, OK indicating that MODE is being received is set (step C105), the reception monitoring timer is set to 0 and started (step C106), and the command reception interrupt processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the received command is not in the MODE range (step C103; N), M
It is determined whether the ODE reception flag is OK (step C107). If the MODE reception flag is not OK (step C107; N), NG indicating that MODE is not received is set as the MODE reception flag (step C120), and the command reception interrupt process ends. In this case, the command is not normally received, and the command in the received command area is discarded.

When the MODE reception flag is OK (step C107; Y), it is determined whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step C108). If the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step C108; Y), MODE is set as the MODE reception flag.
Is set to "NG" (step C120), and the command reception interrupt process ends. In this case, the command is not normally received, and the command in the received command area is discarded.

When the reception monitoring timer has not timed out (step C108; N), the command is saved as a reception ACTION in the reception command area (step C109), and the MODE is set.
NG is set as the reception flag (step C110). Next, receive MODE and receive A
CTION is loaded from the received command area and prepared (step C111), and a received command range check process is performed to check whether the received command is within a valid range as a command (step C112).

The effect control device 300 checks the validity after storing the received command in the received command area provided in the RAM 322. Since there are many types of commands transmitted to the production control device 300 and the range of commands is wide, the validity check is complicated, and after the received command is stored in the reception command area provided in the RAM 322, the validity is newly confirmed. I check it. For this reason, it is possible to secure the accuracy although the processing takes time.

If the range check by the received command range check processing is not OK (step C11)
3; N), that is, if it is outside the valid range as a command, the command reception interrupt process is ended. In this case, the command is not normally received, and the command in the received command area is discarded. If the range check by the received command range check processing is OK (step C113; Y), that is, if the range is valid as a command, it corresponds to the command write index indicating the area for storing the command received this time. The address of the command buffer area to be operated is calculated (step C114), and the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are saved in the calculated command buffer area (step C115). The command buffer area is an area for storing commands in the RAM 322.

Next, the command write index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C116).
, The command reception counter showing the number of commands stored in the command buffer area is 3
It is determined whether it is 2 or more (step C117). In the command buffer area, 32 areas for storing commands are prepared, and when the command reception counter is 32 or more, there is no space in the command buffer area.

When the command reception counter is not 32 or more (step C117; N), the command reception counter is updated by +1 (step C118), and the command reception interrupt process is ended.
In this case, there is a vacancy in the command buffer area and the command is stored in the vacant area.

On the other hand, when the command reception counter is 32 or more (step C117; Y), the command read index indicating the area from which the command is read next is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C119), and the command reception interrupt process is executed. To finish. In this case, there is no space in the command buffer area, and a new command is overwritten in the area where the oldest command is stored, and the command read is performed so that the oldest command next to the overwritten command becomes the next read command. Update the index.

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 62 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the command reception number is 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis operation is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Then, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
It returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is ended. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 63 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When it is determined that the CT is within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
, It is determined whether the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23).
4).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C232). C2
34; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235)
;; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (
In step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (
Step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands (
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot system command such as a hold number command or an error command (step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot type command (step C24
1; Y), the single-shot system command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands ((
In step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243). Then, when MODE is determined to be within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C2)
44) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable type command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis processing.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variability display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) in which the special figure variability display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from the normal mode, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. Then, the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variable system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is a command that gives advance notice of the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the starting memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect, and from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
FIG. 64 shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing described above. In the read-ahead symbol system command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received read-ahead symbol system command is related to special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. Save in the prefetch symbol command area in FIG. 1 (step C302), set the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag (step C304), and finish the prefetch symbol system command processing.

When the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is,
If the received pre-reading symbol system command is related to special figure 2 hold, save the command in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 2 holding (step C303), the pre-reading variable command reception wait flag It is set (step C304), and the prefetching symbol type command processing is ended. The read-ahead variable command reception wait flag is set in step C304 because the read-ahead symbol command and the read-ahead variable command (read-ahead change pattern command) are set (pair).

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
FIG. 65 shows the look-ahead variable system command processing (step C246) in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this prefetching variable command processing, it is first determined whether or not the prefetching variable command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned read-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting. When the prefetching variable command reception is not waiting (step C311)
; N) ends the prefetching variable system command processing. On the other hand, when the pre-reading variable command reception is waiting (step C311; Y), the pre-reading variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processing of steps C313 to C316, processing for converting the look-ahead change command (look-ahead change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is performed so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300. First, the process (step C313) of setting the look-ahead variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information is performed, and the special-drawing-type information of the start-up storage corresponding to the read-ahead variable system command received this time and the relevant information A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the current number of reserved special types.

Next, by referring to the MODE conversion table that has been set, the in-sub prefetch change command MODE corresponding to the MODE of the prefetch change command is acquired (step C314). further,
The look-ahead variable ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the in-sub-look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the look-ahead variable command is acquired (step C316).

The MODE includes information on the first half fluctuation, but the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE changes depending on the number of holdings at the time of judgment, so the judgment at the time of preliminary judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start The judgment result may be different depending on the time judgment. Therefore, in order to make it possible to easily and surely perform the prefetching notice effect processing without being affected by the number of holdings at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of holdings, and It is designed so that they can be handled commonly regardless of the number of holds. For example, if there is no reach and there is a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, or if there is no reach and there is a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding status, The look-ahead notice effect is converted into MODE classified according to the matters to be considered so that the look-ahead notice effect can be processed easily and surely.

Further, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuations such as the presence/absence of reach and the type of reach.
The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in the normal reach, for example, the final stop symbol is set such that the stop symbol is one frame before the reach symbol, the one symbol is one symbol ahead, and the hit case is set.
There are various modes even for the same type of reach, and the ACT corresponding to each of them is set, so that the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system into the same ACTs, the number is reduced to reduce the processing load such as checking in the processing of the prefetching notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C31).
7). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not 0 (step C317; N),
Since the command value is abnormal, the prefetching variable system command processing is terminated. On the other hand, the converted MO
If both DE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and pending number (step C318).
), the prefetch command matching check process (step C319) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

As a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), if the command combination is not normal (step C320; N), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. on the other hand,
When the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), the prefetch lottery process (step C321) for randomly selecting the execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

Then, when the prefetching notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the prefetching variable system command processing is ended. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C322; Y
) Determines whether or not the generated prefetching notice production (that is, the prefetching notice production selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C321)) is a production to be started immediately (step C3).
23). The effect to be started immediately is, for example, a notice of pending change for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, an effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead notice effect that is performed during execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect or a variation that continuously generates a particular effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games. The effect is to give an advance notice by the character appearing during the display, and the pending change advance notice to change the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display at a timing later than the current time. As for the timing of starting the execution of the effect which does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game is ended and the execution of the next special figure variation display game is started. The timing and the like are applicable.

If the effect does not start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetching variable system command processing ends. In this case, the advance notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the prefetch advance notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead notice effect is set (step C324), and the look-ahead variable system command processing ends.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 66 shows the variable system command process (step C2) in the received command analysis process described above.
36). In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is the information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

If this special map type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (
(Step C362), it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (Step C
363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are not compatible (step C363; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63; N) discriminates the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlier symbols, 10R jackpot symbols, 4R jackpot symbols, and small hit symbols. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, when the stray variation command (variation pattern command) is received, as in the case where the symbol command of the 10R big hit symbol is received, on the performance It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type). In addition, if one of the commands has been discarded or damaged, it will be inconsistent, and in this case also, the processing by the variable command and the symbol command will not be performed.

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366).
). Here, the change in special map means that the special map is changing (not being in a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, a fanfare, or the like). Furthermore, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process ends.

Here, the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) form combination information that is used by combining a plurality of pieces of information. In the above-mentioned read-ahead variable system command processing, if the information of one of the read-ahead symbol command and the read-ahead variable command forming the combination information is not normal information such as discarded or damaged, the combination is abnormal. As a result, the prefetch effect executed based on the combination information is not performed (step C320).

Further, the variable command and the symbol command also form combination information which is used by combining a plurality of information. In the above-described variable system command processing, if one of the variable command and the pattern command forming the combination information is not normal information such as discarded or damaged, the combination is regarded as inconsistent. The decorative special figure variation display game executed based on the information is not played (step C363).

As a case where one of such combination information is discarded or damaged, there is a case where the command buffer area has no free space and is overwritten by a new command. In particular, since the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are transmitted periodically, if the command processing is delayed due to some trouble, the command buffer area becomes full, and there is a possibility that the command will be discarded by overwriting. Of course, there may be a case where the received command is discarded or damaged due to a problem other than the command buffer area being full, and for example, a case where the command cannot be received normally due to a transmission/reception problem. Then, by not performing the process corresponding to the case where one of the combination information is discarded or damaged, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the existence of the inconsistent command.

In addition, when one of the combination information is discarded or damaged, all the commands included in the combination information may be discarded. Moreover, when it is found that one of the combination information is damaged, all the commands included in the combination information may be discarded. In this way, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the existence of inconsistent commands, and also to secure a free space in the command buffer area.

Further, in the effect control device 300, a new command is overwritten while the command buffer area is full, so some commands of the combination information are discarded in the state where some of the combination information exists as the oldest command. To be done. When the new command is discarded when the command buffer area is full like the payout control device 200 described later, since the new command is part of the combination information, part of the combination information is The command is discarded. In accordance with such discarding, all the combination information may be discarded. As a result, it becomes possible to secure a free area in the command buffer area at the time when the command before the processing of the command is received is received.

Further, the number of pieces of information forming the combination information may be three or more, and in this case as well, at least one piece is included.
When one piece of information is discarded or damaged, the processing based on the combination information is not performed.

From the above, in the gaming machine capable of executing the game on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and paying out the game medium on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined payout condition, the game control means for controlling the game as a whole (the game control device 100 ), and sub-control means (effect control device 300) for performing control based on information (command) transmitted from the game control means, the sub-control means having a plurality of areas for sequentially storing the received information. The information storage means (RAM 322) having the information storage area (command buffer area) is provided, and when new information is received in a state where there is no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information, the oldest information is stored. It is configured to discard the information of the area and store new information in the area, and the information includes combination information that is used by combining a plurality of information, and a part of the information included in the combination information. When the information of is abandoned, the processing executed based on the combination information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the process from progressing in an incomplete state and causing further defects.

Further, the sub-control unit is a production control unit (production control device 300) that controls production based on production information that is information transmitted from the game control unit, and the game control unit executes the game as combination information. When the variation information (variation command) regarding the aspect and the symbol information (symbol command) regarding the result of the game are transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means discards one of the variation information and the symbol information, This means that the effect related to the game corresponding to the discarded information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a defect such that the decorative special figure variation display game is executed in an incomplete state and an effect that is inconsistent with the result is performed.

Further, the sub-control unit is a production control unit that controls production based on production information that is information transmitted from the game control unit, and the game control unit starts the right to execute the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as a storage (game control device 100)
And prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining the execution mode and result of the game based on the starting memory before starting the game based on the starting memory. Based on the determined determination result, pre-reading variation information regarding the execution mode of the game (pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command)) and pre-reading pattern information regarding the game result (pre-reading pattern command) are transmitted to the production control means. , Production control means, it is possible to execute pre-reading effect that suggests or informs the determination result by the pre-determination means based on the pre-reading variation information and the pre-reading pattern information, and discards one of the pre-reading variation information and the pre-reading pattern information. In this case, the prefetch effect corresponding to the discarded information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the prefetching effect is executed in an incomplete state and an effect that is inconsistent with the result is performed.

Moreover, when discarding some information of the combination information, the secondary control unit may also discard other information of the combination information. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding in an imperfect state and causing further defects.

Next, the control executed by the payout microcomputer 211 of the payout control device 200 will be described. The payout microcomputer 211 performs a main process shown in FIG. 67 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 68.

[Main processing]
The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, first,
An interrupt vector setting process (step A2) for setting a vector address of a jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs after performing an interrupt prohibiting process (step A1), and an interrupt mode setting process for setting a mode of interrupt processing ( Perform step A3).

Next, access to a read/write RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step A4), and all output ports are set to OFF (no output) (step A5). As a result, the firing permission signal 2 output from the payout control device 200 is also set to OFF (prohibited state). After that, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer setting process (step A6) for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. is performed, and the serial port for communicating with the game control device 100 is set. Is performed (step A7).

Then, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step A8), all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared (step A9), and the initial value is saved in the area to be initialized (step A10). ). Next, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal in the pay-out microcomputer (clock generator) is activated (step A11). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the payout microcomputer. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit into a frequency divider circuit and a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU of the dispensing microcomputer based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal.

After that, the interruption is permitted (step A12), and the firing control determination process for determining whether or not the gaming ball can be fired is performed (step A13). In this firing control determination processing, it is determined whether the card unit is properly connected, and if it is properly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set to ON (permission state), and if it is not properly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set. Off (prohibited state)
Set to.

Then, it is determined whether or not the ball lending control mode for discharging the game balls is in progress based on the ball lending request from the card unit (step A14). In the ball lending control mode, the ball lending control in progress flag is set, and whether the ball lending control mode is in progress is determined by the presence or absence of the ball lending control in progress flag.

In the case of this ball lending mode (step A14; Y), a ball lending control process (step A15) that performs overall control relating to the ball lending is performed, a payout control process (step A18) is performed, and an error notification edit process (step A18). Perform A21). This ball lending control process (step A15
) And the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are discharged based on a ball lending request transmitted from the card unit when the player performs a ball lending operation.

On the other hand, when it is not in the ball lending control mode (step A14; N), a prize ball control for ejecting a game ball based on a payout command (prize ball command) transmitted from the game control device 100 when a prize is won in the prize hole. It is determined whether the mode is in progress (step A16). In the prize ball control mode, the prize ball control in progress flag is set, and whether the prize ball control mode is in progress or not is determined by the presence or absence of the prize ball control in progress flag.

When in the prize ball control mode (step A16; Y), the prize ball control process (step A17) for performing integrated control of prize balls is performed, the payout control process (step A18) is performed, and the error notification editing process is performed. (Step A21) is performed. This prize ball control processing (step A17)
By the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are discharged based on the payout command transmitted from the game control device 100 due to the occurrence of the winning in the winning opening.

In the payout control process (step A18), sequence control necessary for performing common game ball payout operation in paying out prize balls and paying out balls is performed. Note that the ball lending control flag and the prize ball in-control flag are cleared by the completion of the payout of the prize ball or the ball lending in this payout control process, and the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode are completed. There is.

If the prize ball control mode is not in effect (step A16; N), an overpayment error monitoring process (step A19) for monitoring the occurrence or cancellation of an error in which a game ball has been overpaid is performed. It should be noted that the release of the overpayment error is performed based on the operation of the error release switch provided in the payout control device 200.

Then, the payout device control start determination processing (step A20) for setting the start of the ball lending control mode or the prize ball control mode is performed, and the error notification editing processing (step A21) is performed. In the error notification editing process (step A21), the status of various errors is determined, and the payout control device 20
The display data of the error status display device provided in 0 is edited, the information transmitted to the game control device 100 is edited, and the output data of the test firing test signal is edited. After that, the condition regarding the output of the payout busy signal that indicates to the game control device 100 whether the payout control can be started is determined, and the payout busy signal editing process of editing the output data of the payout busy signal (step A
22) is performed, and the process returns to step A13.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process in the payout control device 200 will be described. In the timer interrupt processing, the periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is CP.
It starts when it is input to U211A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the payout microcomputer, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 68 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, a register saving process (step A31) for moving the value held in a predetermined register to the RWM is performed. Incidentally, in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the payout microcomputer in the present embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step A32) for performing drive control of the payout motor and the like is performed, and inputs from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, each An input process (step A33) of reading the state of the input port is performed.

Next, a timer update process (step A34) for updating various timers is performed, and a command reception process for receiving a command from the game control device 100 is performed (step A35).
Then, a ball lending request monitoring process (step A36) is performed in which a ball lending request from the card unit is checked and settings are made to enable payout of prize balls and ball lending. After that, an input monitoring process (step A37) for monitoring a switch system signal to be input such as a signal from the payout ball detection switch 81, a shoot ball cutout switch 82, an overflow switch 83, a frame radio wave sensor 84, and an abnormality detection signal 1. I do.

Then, the payout unit editing process (step A38) of editing the control signal of the payout motor is performed, and the payout prize ball signal transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer is edited each time the number of actually paid prize balls reaches a predetermined number. The external information editing process (step A39) is performed. continue,
Declaring the end of interrupt (step A40), restoring the data of the register saved in step A31 (step A41), and then permitting interrupt (step A42)
Then, the timer interrupt processing ends.

[Command reception processing]
69 shows a command reception process (step A in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 68).
35). In this command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a received command in the serial reception buffer register of the serial communication circuit that receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100 (step A51). If there is no received command (step A51; N), the command receiving process ends. If there is a received command (step A51; Y), the received command is read from the reception buffer register to the register of the CPU 211A (step A52).

Next, it is determined whether the received command read to the register of the CPU 211A is a normal value (step A53), and if it is not a normal value (step A53; N), the command reception process is ended. In this case, the received command is discarded. If it is a normal value (step A53; Y), it is determined whether the receiving buffer area, which is the storage area provided in the RAM 211B, is full (step A54).

If the reception buffer area is full (step A54; Y), the command reception process ends. In this case, the received command is discarded. If the reception buffer area is not full (step A54; N), the number of received commands in the command reception counter indicating the number of commands stored in the reception buffer area is updated by +1 (step A55). In the reception buffer area of this embodiment, 16 areas for storing received commands are prepared, and when the command reception counter is 16, it is determined that the reception buffer area is full. There is. The number of storage areas provided in the reception buffer area can be set arbitrarily and may be one.

Then, the address of the receive buffer area corresponding to the command write index indicating the area for storing the command received this time is calculated (step A56), and the received command is saved in the calculated receive buffer area (step A57). Then, the command writing index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 15 (step A58), and the command receiving process is ended.

The number of commands transmitted to payout control device 200 is smaller than the number of commands transmitted to effect control device 300. Therefore, the number of areas for storing the received command in the payout control device 200 (here, 16) is smaller than the number of areas for storing the received command in the effect control device 300 (here, 32). .

FIG. 70 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the command receiving process executed by the CPU 211A of the payout control device 200. Each program list of the game control program executed by the payout control device 200 is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) similar to Z80 which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and excludes pseudo instructions (instructions to the assembler) and the like. , One-to-one correspondence with machine language instructions (machine codes) stored in the ROM 211B (game control program storage means).

From the left side, the description of the instruction (code) in each program list is a "line number" added for convenience, a "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (computation content) of the instruction, an "operand" of the instruction target, and a description facility. It is divided into "comments" attached for. Unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction), the instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (smallest to largest).

The codes in line numbers 4020 and 4030 correspond to the processing in step A51. Line number 402
At 0, the value (the value corresponding to the label C_RXBST) of the reception buffer status register which is a register indicating the number of bytes of the received data is loaded into the A register. In line number 4030, if there is no received command, the command reception process ends.

The codes in line numbers 4060 to 4090 correspond to the processing in steps A52 and A53. In line number 4060, the command received in the W register (value corresponding to label C_RXBUF)
And the line number 4070 to 4080 ends when the loaded value is a value not defined as a command. That is, the legitimacy is checked on the register of the CPU 211A before the received command is stored in the RAM 211C. Since the number of types of commands transmitted to the payout control device 200 is small and the range of commands is narrow, it is easy to check the correctness, and the speed is increased by performing the check before storing in the reception buffer area. ..

The codes in line numbers 4120 to 4150 correspond to the processing in steps A54 and A55. In line number 4120, the command reception counter (label R_COM_CNT+0 is stored in the HL register).
Load the value corresponding to 0H). In line numbers 4130 and 4140, the loaded value is 16
If so, the reception buffer area is full, and the process ends. In line number 4150, the number of received commands is updated by +1 if the receive buffer area is not full.

The codes in line numbers 4180 to 4200 correspond to the processing in steps A56 and A57. In line number 4180, the start address (label R_COM_
The value corresponding to BUF+00H is loaded, and in line number 4190, the command write index (the value corresponding to label R_WRIT_IDX+00H) is loaded into the A register. In line number 4200, the command stored in the W register is stored at the address corresponding to the value obtained by adding the value of the A register to the HL register.

The codes in line numbers 4230 to 4250 correspond to the processing in step A58. Line number 42
At 30 and 4240, the value of the A register is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 15. Line number 4250
Then, the value of the A register is stored in the area of the command write index (label R_WRIT_IDX+00H).

[Payout device control start determination processing]
71 shows the payout device control start determination processing (step A20) in the main processing shown in FIG. 67. In the payout device control start determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is an overpayment error (step A61). The overpayment error is an error that occurs when the cumulative value of the number of balls paid out in prize balls or ball lending exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 16). When this overpayment error is occurring (step A61; Y), the payout device control start determination processing ends. If the overpayment error is not in progress (step A61; N
) Determines whether or not a ball rental request has been detected (step A62). The ball rental request is a request for paying out a ball input from the card unit based on the player's operation, and the fact that the ball rental request has been detected means that the ball rental request is detected after the ball rental request is detected. It is a state until the ball lending operation based on (4) is started.

When the ball lending request has been detected (step A62; Y), the ball lending control mode flag is set in the payout device control mode flag (step A74), and the payout device control start determination processing ends. Since the confirmation of the detection of the ball lending request is performed before the prize ball payout processing described below, the ball lending control mode flag is set by overwriting the prize ball control mode flag. That is, when both the prize ball payout and the ball rental payout are feasible, the ball loan payout is prioritized.

When the request for ball rental has not been detected (step A62; N), it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout start prohibition state is set (step A63). The prize ball payout start prohibition state is a state in which the start of payout of prize balls is prohibited, and a frame radio wave error that is set based on detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor 84 is occurring, or a sensor or proximity is detected. Applicable when a switch abnormality is set, which is set based on the detection of an abnormal state where the switch lead wire is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floated. .. When it is in the prize ball payout start prohibition state (step A63; Y), the payout device control start determination processing is ended. When the prize ball payout start prohibited state is not set (step A63; N), RA
It is determined whether or not there is a received command in the reception buffer area of M211C (step A64).
).

If there is a receive command in the receive buffer area (step A64; Y), the number of receive commands in the command receive counter is updated by -1 (step A65), and the receive buffer corresponding to the command read index indicating the area from which the command is to be read next. Calculate the area (step A
66). Then, the reception command is read from the calculated reception buffer area (step A6).
7) The read reception buffer area is cleared (step A68), and the command read index is updated by -1 within the range of 0 to 15 (step A69).

Next, it is determined whether the received command has a normal value (step A70). Payout control device 2
In 00, the validity is determined not only when the command is received but also in the process corresponding to the command. If the received command is not a normal value (step A70; N),
Return to step A64. In this case, the read command is discarded. If the received command is a normal value (step A70; Y), the number of prize balls corresponding to the received command is added to the remaining number of game balls to be acquired (step A71), and the process returns to step A64. What is the remaining number of game balls?
It is the number of prize balls for which payout has not been completed among the prize balls set to be paid out based on the payout command.

When the process from step A64 to A71 is repeated and there is no received command in the reception buffer area (step A64; N), it is determined whether the remaining number of game balls is 0 (step A72), and the remaining number of game balls is acquired. When it is 0 (step A72; N), the payout device control start determination processing ends. If the remaining number of game balls is not 0 (step A72; Y),
Set the prize ball control mode flag to the payout device control mode flag (step A73),
The payout device control start determination processing ends.

In other words, the card unit issues a ball lending command related to the discharge of the ball lending (
A ball lending signal control means for outputting a ball lending request). Further, the payout control device 200 sends a prize ball command (payout command) sent from the game control means (game control device 100) and a ball lending command (ball lending request) sent from the ball lending signal control means (card unit). Based on, the payout control means for performing payout control of the game balls is formed.

[Payout busy signal editing process]
FIG. 72 shows a payout busy signal editing process (step A in the main process shown in FIG. 67).
22). In this payout busy signal editing process, ON data of the payout busy signal is set when the prize ball payout control cannot be started (step A97), and the payout busy signal is turned off when the prize ball payout control can be started. Data is set (step A96).

The case where the prize ball payout control cannot be started is the case where the payout is prohibited (step A91).
; Y), when not in the ball lending control mode or in the prize ball control mode, which is not in the standby operation (step A92; Y), when the shoot ball out switch is in the unconfirmed state (step A93; Y), When the overflow switch is in the undetermined state (step A94; Y)
, When the reception buffer area is full (step A95; Y).

In addition, the payout prohibition state is when there are errors such as shooting ball out error (ball out), overflow error (overflow), frame radio error, switch error error, overpayment error etc. Is set to. In addition, the undetermined state of the switch is
The detection status of the switch is not fixed. The detection state of the switch is determined when the state (on or off) in which the switch detects an error state or a normal state continues for a specified time. Since the detection state of the switch is reset when the power is turned on, the detection state of the switch remains undetermined until the switch remains in the error state or the normal state for a specified time. If an error status is detected for a specified period of time and the switch detection status is confirmed as an error status, the error status is released if no error status is detected for a predetermined time. It is supposed to do.

The game control device 100 does not transmit the payout command when the payout busy signal is ON. Since the payout control device 200 does not have a backup function at the time of power failure, if a payout command is successively sent during the payout of prize balls or rental balls or in a situation where the payout cannot be paid out, a prize will be given if a power failure occurs. The memory of the number of balls disappears, and it becomes impossible to pay accurately. In addition, the reception buffer area for storing commands may be full. Therefore, the payout command indicates whether or not the payout command can be received so that the payout command can be received only when the payout control can be started immediately.

Since the command is not transmitted from the game control device 100 when the command cannot be processed in this way, basically, the receiving buffer area becomes full, or a new command is issued when the receiving buffer area is full. Never receive. Therefore, if a new command is received while the reception buffer area is full, some abnormality has occurred in the game control device 100 or the payout control device 200, that a fraudulent act has been performed, or noise has occurred. It is highly possible that the new command is not a normal command because it may have been affected.

Therefore, in the payout control device 200, when a new command is received while the reception buffer area is full, the new command is discarded. That is, the oldest command stored in the receive buffer area is likely to have been sent before the abnormal state occurred, and if the oldest command is overwritten with a new command, the normal command May be overwritten with an invalid command. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the game by discarding a new command that is likely to be an illegal command.

In FIG. 73, the outline of the process at the time of receiving the command in the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is shown. In the effect control device 300, the command received from the game control device 100 is stored in the register of the CPU 311 (step S11), and then stored in the received command area which is a dedicated area of the RAM 322 (step S12). Then, the command is fetched from the received command area, which is a dedicated area, into the register of the CPU 311, and the validity is confirmed (step S13).

If the received command is not a normal value (step S14; N), the received command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step S14; Y), RA
The address of the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of M322, is calculated (step S15). If the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is not full (step S16; N), the command is stored at the calculated address. When the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is full (step S16; Y), the new command is overwritten and stored in the address where the oldest command is stored.

In the payout control device 200, the command received from the game control device 100 is sent to the CPU 211A.
In the register (step S21), and then confirm the validity on the register (step S22). If the received command is not a normal value (step S23; N), the received command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step S23; Y
) Calculates the address of the reception buffer area which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C (step S24). Then, if the reception buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is not full (step S25; N), the command is stored in the calculated address (step S26). If the reception buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is full (step S25; Y), the received command is discarded (step S2).
8).

As described above, the process of the command received from the game control device 100 is different between the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200. Since the payout control device 200 confirms the validity of the command on the register of the CPU 211A, the number of processes is small and high-speed processing is possible. There are few types of commands to the payout control device 200, it is easy to confirm the correctness, and there is no inconvenience even if they are processed on the register. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 stores the received command in the dedicated area of the RAM 322 and then confirms the validity. The number and types of commands transmitted to the production control device 300 are larger than those of the payout control device 200, and the process for confirming the validity is complicated. Therefore, once the command is stored in the RAM 322, the validity is confirmed. It ensures that the processing can be performed.

When the command storage area is full, the payout control device 200 discards the new command. As described above, the command storage area does not normally fill up, it is an abnormal state, and the new command is likely to be an illegal command. If the payout is made by such an illegal command, the payout amount may be larger than planned. In particular, since it is possible that a large amount of commands are transmitted due to fraudulent acts, it is possible to prevent fraudulent payouts by discarding new commands.

On the other hand, in the production control device 300, the new command is replaced with the oldest command. In the effect control device 300 as well, the command storage area does not normally fill up, and it is conceivable that it is in some abnormal state. When the command is received, the contents of the command have not been analyzed yet and may be an important command. Therefore, even if the command storage area is full, a new command is saved, and the necessary command Is prevented from being discarded. Also, it is more likely that the new command will be more relevant to the current situation than the old command, and the old command is often no longer needed, so save the new command. ing.

Further, the game control device 100 is configured to regularly transmit the game machine status commands 1 and 2 including information regarding the presence/absence of an abnormality in the game machine. If there is no space in the command storage area, this command is issued. It is possible that a plurality of gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 are stored. The gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 show the current status of the most recently received command, and there is no need for the old command, so there is no problem even if they are discarded by overwriting. Even if the latest gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are discarded by overwriting, since they are transmitted regularly, there is no problem in grasping the gaming machine status.

Although the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 have been described here, the same process can be applied to other sub-control devices that receive information from the game control device 100. In this case, depending on the property of the slave control device, the process similar to that of the effect control device 300 or the process similar to that of the payout control device 200 is selected. Further, the command processing method is not limited to the control device that receives a command from the game control device 100, and any command control device that receives a command from another control device can apply such a command processing method. Is.

From the above, in the gaming machine capable of executing the game on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and paying out the game medium on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined payout condition, the game control means for controlling the game as a whole (the game control device 100). ), the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling production based on the production information transmitted from the game control means, and the payout control for controlling the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control device 200), the effect control means includes effect information storage means (RAM322) having an effect information storage area (command buffer area) for storing the received effect information, and unprocessed effect information When new effect information is received in a state where there is no space in the effect information storage area, the oldest effect information is discarded and new effect information is stored, and the payout control means stores the received payout information. A payout information storage unit having a payout information storage area is provided, and when new payout information is received when there is no space in the payout information storage area due to unprocessed payout information, the new payout information is discarded. It has been done. Therefore, it is possible to deal with the case where the received command cannot be stored, according to each control means, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. It can be anything.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and can dispense a game medium based on the satisfaction of a predetermined payout condition, a game control means for controlling the game as a whole (
The game control device 100), the first sub-control device (for example, the production control device 300), which is the sub-control device that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device, and the second sub-control device (for example, the sub-control device).
Payout control device 200), and the first sub-control means and the second sub-control means have information storage means (RAM 322, R having an information storage area having a plurality of areas for sequentially storing the received information).
AM211C), the first sub-control means is provided with a larger number of areas than the second sub-control means, and the first control means is newly added in a state where there is no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information. If such information is received, the information in the area in which the oldest information is stored is discarded and new information is stored in the area, and the second control means has no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information. When new information is received in the state, the new information is discarded. Therefore, since it is possible to deal with the case where the received command cannot be stored according to the number of storage areas in each control means, it is possible to minimize the influence on the progress of the game. Can be appropriately dealt with.

Further, the first sub-control means is an effect control means (effect control device 300) which controls the effect based on effect information which is information transmitted from the game control means, and the second sub-control means is the game control means. The payout control means (payout control device 200) controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information forming the information transmitted from Therefore, it is possible to deal with the case where the received command cannot be stored, according to each control means, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. It can be anything.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the satisfaction of a predetermined payout condition, a game control means for generally controlling a game and a game control means are transmitted. Sub-control means (payout control device 200
, Production control device 300), and the secondary control means is provided with information storage means (RAM 322, RAM 211C) having an information storage area having a plurality of areas for sequentially storing the received information, and stores new information. A write index indicating an area to be read, a read index indicating an area from which information is read next, and an information counter (command reception counter) indicating the number of areas in which information is currently stored. Therefore, the writing area and the reading area of the information can be appropriately grasped, the information of the empty area at the present time can be obtained, the reading and writing of the information can be appropriately managed, and the control processing can be efficiently performed.

Further, the sub-control means, the effect control means for controlling the effect based on the effect information forming the information transmitted from the game controlling means, and the payout of the game medium based on the payout information forming the information transmitted from the game controlling means. The payout control means for controlling the effect, the effect control means, as the information storage means, is provided with effect information storage means (RAM322) having an effect information storage area that is an information storage area for storing the received effect information. When new effect information is received when the effect information counter, which is a counter, indicates that there is no space in the effect information storage area, the information in the area in which the oldest effect information is stored is discarded and New payout information is stored in the area, and the payout control means is provided with a payout information storage means (RAM211C) having a payout information storage area which is an information storage area for storing the received payout information, as an information storage means. If the new payout information is received when the payout information counter that makes up the status indicates that the payout information storage area is full, the new payout information is discarded. Therefore, it is possible to deal with the case where the received command cannot be stored, according to each control means, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. It can be anything.

Further, a game control means for controlling a game in a game machine which executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. , A production control unit that controls production based on production information transmitted from the game control unit, and the game control unit includes, as production information, information on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Information can be periodically transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is provided with effect information storage means having an effect information storage area for storing the received effect information, and the effect information storage area stores unprocessed effect information in the effect information storage area. When new effect information is received in a state where there is no space, the oldest effect information is discarded and new effect information is stored. Only the latest gaming machine state information that is periodically transmitted is required, and the old one is not required. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the progress of the game with respect to the case where the received command cannot be stored, so that it is possible to appropriately deal with the malfunction.

Further, the game control means is adapted to periodically transmit the game machine status information only when an abnormality has occurred in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command transmission frequency from increasing in a normal case, and reduce the control load. In addition, when an abnormality has occurred, it is transmitted periodically, so that even if a command is missed, no problem will occur and it is possible to reliably notify the effect control means of the abnormality.

Further, the game control means is adapted to periodically transmit the game machine status information over a certain period when the abnormality occurring in the game machine is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the effect control means that the abnormality has been resolved.

Further, the effect control means, an effect operation processing means (CPU 311) which is an operation processing means for performing effect operation processing, an effect information storage means (RAM 322) having an effect information storage area for storing the effect information received. When the effect information is received, the effect information is stored in the effect information storage area after the effect information is stored on the register of the effect calculation processing means without performing a predetermined process for the effect information. The payout control means performs a predetermined process on the effect information, and the payout control means is a payout calculation processing means (CP) which is a calculation processing means for performing a payout calculation process.
U211A) and a payout information storage unit (RAM211C) having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information, and when the payout information is received, the payout information is predetermined on the register of the payout calculation processing unit. After the processing is performed, the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area. The type and content range of the received command differs depending on the control means, and the processing of the received command can be efficiently performed by making the processing suitable for each control means.

Further, the predetermined process is a legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the performance information or the payout information, and if the legitimacy determination process determines that the performance information is not valid, the performance information or the payout information is discarded. This is what I did. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to an invalid command. The validity determination process for determining the validity of the effect information and the validity determination process for determining the validity of the payout information may be different processes or the same process.

Further, the effect control means, when receiving the effect information, stores the effect information in a dedicated area of the effect information storage area, then performs the validity determination process on the effect information, and the validity determination process is valid. When it is determined that the effect information is stored in the storage area of the effect information storage area, the payout control means, when the payout information is received, regarding the payout information on the register of the payout calculation processing means. This means that the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area after the validity determination process is performed. Therefore, since it is stored in the storage area only when the validity is confirmed, unnecessary commands are not stored in the storage area, and the control process can be efficiently advanced.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines, such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Gaming Machine 100 Game Control Device (Game Control Means)
200 Dispensing control device (dispensing control means)
211C RAM (payout information storage means)
300 production control device (production control means)
322 RAM (production information storage means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the satisfaction of a predetermined payout condition,
A game control means for controlling the game as a whole,
Production control means for controlling production based on production information transmitted from the game control means,
And a payout control means for controlling payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control means,
The payout control means,
A payout information storage unit having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information,
A game machine characterized by discarding the new payout information when the new payout information is received in a state where there is no space in the payout information storage area due to the unprocessed payout information.